P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE Healthcare
1/18/10
GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM
LOGIQ™ 9
Basic Service Manual
Part Number: 2294853-100
Revision: 14
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
WARNING
(EN)
AVERTISSEMENT
(FR)
WARNUNG
(DE)
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.
• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.
• SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
• NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER
SPRACHE.
• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
• WARTEN SIE DIESES GERÄT NUR, WENN SIE DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN
ANWWEISUNGEN IM KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH GELESEN HABEN UND
NACHVOLLZIEHEN KÖNNEN.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
i
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
AVISO
(ES)
ATENÇÃO
(PT)
AVVERTENZA
(IT)
HOIATUS
(ET)
ii
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.
• SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, LA TRADUCCIÓN ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE.
• NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM
INGLÊS.
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
• NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN
INGLESE.
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
• SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
• NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
• KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.
• KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
• ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA
TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.
• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE
VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.
-
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
VAROITUS
(FI)
VIÐVÖRUN
(IS)
• ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.
• EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN
ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU.
• REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG
SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK.
• EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM
ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS,
VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU.
iii
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
ADVARSEL
(DA)
WAARSCHUWING
(NL)
iv
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
• DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.
• HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.
• FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET.
• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE
PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR
TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
• DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS
VERKRIJGBAAR.
• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE
KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
• PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
-
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
ADVARSEL
(NO)
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
• DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.
• HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
• IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.
• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.
OSTRZEŻENIE
(PL)
v
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
VARNING
(SV)
vi
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
• DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.
• OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA
ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.
• FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST
OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I
SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
-
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
(JA)
(ZH-CN)
(KO)
vii
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY
All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable
electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS
If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual
title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to:
Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.
GE Healthcare employees should use TRACKWISE to report all documentation errors or omissions.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section of
the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic Service Manual (2294853-100).
viii
-
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE Healthcare.
GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material Copyright© 2002-2010 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved
ix
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
10/12/10
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Revision History
Revision
Date
(YYYY/MM/DD)
Reason for change
0
2002/04/08
Initial Release
1
2002/11/08
Update for BT’02 Release, BEP and FEP changes
2
2003/04/04
Update for R2.1.1 Release and hardware changes
3
2003/10/23
Update for R3.0 Release and hardware changes
4
2004/09/15
Update for R4.0 Release, BEP3, 4D option, CW option
5
2004/11/13
Update for R4.1.0
6
2005/10/25
M3 Update for R6.x release, Added Legal Page, Cover Revision, Flat Monitor, TD Board changes
7
2005/11/21
Update for R6.0.5O.
8
2006/07/25
Update for R7.x release. Added DVR, hardware changes. Release for MS
9
2006/08/01
Update for R7.x release. Release for M3
10
2006/09/06
Update for R7.x release.
11
2007/12/04
Update for R7.x, branding cover updates, additional precaution languages, 19” LCD, BEP4.x, FRU
numbers, R7.x baseload instructions.
12
2009/05/27
Update for R9.x
13
2010/01/15
Update for IE6 60601-1-6
14
2010/10/12
Updated for removal of CE Mark
List of Effected Pages(LOEP)
Pages
Revision
Title Page
N/A
Important Precautions
pages i to iv
Rev History/LOEP
pages v to x
Table of Contents
pages ix to xxxiii
Chapter 1 - Introduction
pages 1-1 to 1-24
14
14
14
Pages
Chapter 2 - Site Preparation
pages 2-1 to 2-10
Chapter 3 - System Setup
pages 3-1 to 3-26
Chapter 4 - Functional Checks
pages 4-1 to 4-28
Chapter 5 - Components and
Functions (Theory)
Revision
Pages
Revision
14
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/
Troubleshooting
14
pages 7-1 to 7-34
14
Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments
pages 6-1 to 6-18
14
14
14
Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts
pages 9-1 to 9-72
Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance
pages 10-1 to 10-30
Index
pages I to IV
Back Cover
x
-
14
pages 8-1 to 8-98
pages 5-1 to 5-98
14
Chapter 8 - Replacement
Procedures
14
14
14
N/A
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Service Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Contents in this Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Overview of the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
History - Hardware/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
History - Peripherals/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
History - Supported Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
How to Turn the Scanner On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options 1 - 7
Product Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Model Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Safety Precaution Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
xi
Table of Contents
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24
xii
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 2
Site Preparation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Unit Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Power Stability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
Networking Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Scanner Connected to Hospital’s Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
InSite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Table of Contents
xiii
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 3
System Setup
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Average Set Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Set Up Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Operator I/O Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Preparing for Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
Rating Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
Video Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
Completing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Transducer Connection and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Console Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Acoustic Noise Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Other I/O Ports (Front of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
xiv
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Before Starting a Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Loading Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Printer Set Up (R4.x and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Printer Set Up (R2.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Table of Contents
xv
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4
Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
To Boot Up Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
To Place System in Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
To Power Off Back-End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
To Shut Down Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Connect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Activate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Deactivate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Disconnect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
Using CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Activate CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Omit Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Restore Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Start Frame/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Report Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
xvi
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
For BT03 and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
For BT04 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Using the MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
USB Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . 4 - 22
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Brakes and Direction Locks Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Table of Contents
xvii
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Dataflow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Front End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) . . . . 5 - 8
FEPS3.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
Front End Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Top Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board
(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
SCB, SCB2 High Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Scan Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
EBM, EBM2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
B–Mode Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
M–Mode Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Back End Processor (BEP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
PCIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
PCI Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
xviii
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Inputs (BEP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Back End Processor (BEP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
PCIO Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002) . . . . . . 5 - 29
Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32
USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup
(RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33
Back End Processor (BEP 3.x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
Inputs (BEP 3.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
Table of Contents
xix
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Inputs (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43
BEP Power On Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44
BEP Power Off Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Operator Console Control PWA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46
Console Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47
Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47
Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51
Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) . . 5 - 52
Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Video Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Audio Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Connectors – Solder Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Interface Connectors – Component Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62
xx
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
External I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Modem and USB Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
LEDs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
AC Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72
AC Power PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72
AC Controller Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Mechanical Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
19” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Wheels/Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Table of Contents
xxi
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Planned Maintenance (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90
4D Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Principle of Volume Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
4D Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable . . . . . 5 - 92
USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94
Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95
Continuous Wave Doppler Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
PCI CW Doppler PWA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Internal CW Doppler Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Probe Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Mu Metal Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
xxii
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6
Service Adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Monitor Adjustment (Standard only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
Visible Image Display Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Monitor Tilt (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Z-Release Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Checking the Release System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
Emergency Release Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Brake Arm Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Table of Contents
xxiii
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Brake Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Front Wheel Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Front Brake Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Rear Wheel Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
Rear Wheel Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
xxiv
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Service Safety Considerations
...................................... 7-2
Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Collecting Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6
Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Check and Record the P4 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Acquisition Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
Diagnostic Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 21
Calibration Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23
I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
Launching the Op Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
Trackball Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25
Keyboard Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Slidepots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Encoders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27
Pushbuttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27
LEDs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28
Touchscreen Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28
Ending the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Table of Contents
xxv
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Dicom Verify Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Hard Drive Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
xxvi
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
Replacement Procedures
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5. . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 . . . . 8 - 12
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Before Starting a Software Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Table of Contents
xxvii
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Save Connectivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
DICOM TCPIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Image Management Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Managing Patient Data and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Patient Images and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Preset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Backup Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
EZBackup/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
User-Defined Backup Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
To Prepare to Load Base Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Loading Application Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x . . . . . . 8 - 54
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Application Software Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
To Complete the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
DVR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Print Key Assignment and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Cycle System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Standby Operation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
xxviii
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
To Place the System in the Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Release Lock Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Release Lock Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Gas Shock Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Top Tray Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Gas Shock Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Install the New Gas Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81
Reassemble Z-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Wirecable Removal Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Wirecable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Wirecable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90
Frog Leg Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Table of Contents
xxix
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
Console View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5
Additional Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9
Bumper Kit, Frogleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
Operator Control Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
CRT Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Operator Control Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20
Upper Op Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20
Lower Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22
Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
Front End Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26
I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
3-D Externals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34
Back End Processor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35
BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35
BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36
BEP 3.x / 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 41
Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44
xxx
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Peripheral Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44
Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 48
Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 49
AC Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 50
Power Distribution Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 61
Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 62
Voice Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 63
Voice Scan Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 65
4D Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 66
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 67
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 68
Customer Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 69
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 70
Table of Contents
xxxi
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10
Care & Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
xxxii
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16
Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Generic procedure on Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
Meter procedure using probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe
Isolation (Sink) Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 27
ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
Table of Contents
xxxiii
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_TOC.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
xxxiv
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner. The service
provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or
servicing a unit.
Table 1-1
Contents in Chapter 1
Section
1-1-2
Description
Page Number
1-1
Overview
1-1
1-2
Service Manual Overview
1-2
1-3
Important Conventions
1-9
1-4
Safety Considerations
1-16
1-5
Labels Locations
1-18
1-6
Dangerous Procedure Warnings
1-18
1-7
Battery Safety
1-20
1-8
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)
1-21
1-9
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
1-21
1-10
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1-22
1-11
Customer Assistance
1-23
Purpose of Service Manual
This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ 9 Ultrasound
Scanning System.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-1
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 1-2
Service Manual Overview
1-2-1
Contents in this Service Manual
1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings.
2.) Chapter 2 - Site Preparation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ 9.
3.) Chapter 3 - System Setup: Contains installation procedures.
4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.
5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional
explanations of the electronics.
6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to
the LOGIQ™ 9.
7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related
routines for the LOGIQ™ 9.
8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly
procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU).
9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ™ 9.
10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ™ 9.
1-2-2
1-2
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual
•
Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.)
•
Hospital’s Service Personnel
•
Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)
Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-2-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual
Table 1-2
LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations
Part Number
Description
2188900
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-4
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-5
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-6
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0
2351100
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2375600
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2404587
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
5150000
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5177000
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and
BT’09*
5177000-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and
BT’09*
5177000-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07
and BT’09*
*BT09 is a software-only upgrade
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-3
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-2-4
1-2-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Product Description
Overview of the Product
LOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input
sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:
-
B-Mode
-
M-Mode
-
Color Flow Mode (CFM)
-
Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps
-
PW Doppler with high PRF
-
B-Flow Mode
-
M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging
LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the
Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard
drive on power up.
1-4
Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-2-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Overview of the Product (cont’d)
Name Plate
Monitor (CRT)
Monitor Controls
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Operator Console
Front Cover
VCR
B/W Printer
3.5” MOD
CD-ROM
or DVD
Probe Connector
Backend Processor Chassis
Swivel Lock
Front Bumper
Brake Release
Figure 1-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-5
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-2-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Overview of the Product (cont’d)
17”LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust)
Operator Console
VCR
Front Cover
B/W Printer
Probe Connector
CD-ROM
or DVD
Backend Processor
Chassis
Front Bumper
Swivel Lock
Brake Release
Figure 1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with 17” LCD Option - Major Components
1-6
Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-2-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Overview of the Product (cont’d)
19” LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Gel Warmer
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust)
Touchscreen/Display
Operator Console
Figure 1-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD
1-2-4-2
History - Hardware/Software versions
The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-3
History - Peripherals/Software versions
The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-4
FRUs for Back End Processor
The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-5
History - Supported Probes
The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-6
How to Turn the Scanner On and Off
Please refer to Chapter 4, section 4-2-2 "Power On / Boot Up" , for a detailed description of how to turn
the scanner ON and to Chapter 4, section 4-2-4 "Power Off / Shutdown" for a detailed description of
how to turn the scanner OFF.
1-2-4-7
How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options
To verify hardware versions on the boards, refer to Section 9-11 "Front End Processor Assembly"
Please refer to Section 4-3 "Software Configuration Checks" to check the software versions on local
software on the boards.
Please refer to Chapter 4 to check for installed options.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-7
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-2-4-8
Product Manuals
NOTE:
The LOGIQ™ 9 Unpacking Procedure is delivered on paper.
See Section 9-23 "Customer Documentation" for customer documentation available for the product.
1-2-4-9
Purpose of Operator Manual(s)
The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and also
kept near the unit for quick reference.
1-8
Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 1-3
Important Conventions
1-3-1
1-3-1-1
Conventions Used in Book
Model Designations
This manual covers the LOGIQ™ 9 scanners.
1-3-1-2
Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
1-3-1-3
Safety Precaution Messages
Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:
DANGER
DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL
CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury
and property damage if instructions are ignored.
NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible
Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.
Example: Disk drive will crash.
NOTE:
Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure.
Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-9
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-3-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Standard Hazard Icons
Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained
within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different
graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of
hazards that could cause harm.
Table 1-3
Standard Hazard Icons
ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL
RADIATION
LASER
HEAT
PINCH
LASER
LIGHT
Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-4
Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY
TAG AND LOCK OUT
WEAR EYE PROTECTION
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed
1-10
Date
Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
EYE
PROTECTION
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-3-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Product Icons
The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the equipment.
Table 1-5
Product Icons
LABEL/SYMBOL
PURPOSE/MEANING
LOCATION
Identification and Rating Plate
Manufacturer’s name and address.
Rear panel
Date of manufacture
Rating Plate
Serial Number
Rating Plate
Catalog Number
Rating Plate
Identification and Rating Plate
Type/Class Label
Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.
Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 87802-03 indicates B Type equipment having even more
electrical isolation than standard Type B equipment
because it is intended for intimate patient contact.
Equipment Type BF Applied Part (man in the box with
paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5334.
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 87802-05 indicates equipment having a high degree of
protection suitable for direct cardiac contact.
Chapter 1 Introduction
Probe connectors
PCG connector
or Rear of Console
Probe
ECG connector
Surgical probes
1-11
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 1-5
LABEL/SYMBOL
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Product Icons (Continued)
PURPOSE/MEANING
LOCATION
Defibrillator-proof type of equipment.
At the ECG connector on front of system.
This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may
result if one person attempts to move the unit
considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight
of the unit.
On the console where easily seen during
transport
"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in
combination with other symbols to advise or warn the
user.
Various
Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult
accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user
to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when
complete information cannot be provided on the label.
Various
Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult
accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user
to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when
complete information cannot be provided on the label.
May appear on some probes
"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with
arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate
electric shock hazards.
Various
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the
mains power switch.
Rear of system adjacent to mains switch
“CAUTION
This unit weighs...
Special care must be used to
avoid..."
1-12
Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 1-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL
PURPOSE/MEANING
LOCATION
"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position
of the power switch.
CAUTION
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains
Supply
Adjacent to On-Off Switch
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains
power switch.
"ON" Indicates the power on position of the power
switch.
Front Panel Switch
CAUTION
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains
Supply
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth
(grounding) terminal.
Internal
"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for
connecting equipotential conductors when
interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.
Rear of console
This unit carries the CE mark.
The LOGIQ™ 9 unit complies with regulatory
requirements of the European Directive 93/42/EEC
concerning medical devices.
Rear of Console
It also complies with emission limits for a Group 1, Class
B Medical Device as stated in EN 60601-1-2
(IEC 60601-1-2).
NOTE: CE Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.
United States only
Prescription Requirement label
Authorized European Representative address.
Rear Panel
Rear Panel
NOTE: EC REP Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-13
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 1-5
LABEL/SYMBOL
1-14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Product Icons (Continued)
PURPOSE/MEANING
LOCATION
ETL Listing Mark Monogram
Rear Panel
GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory Country Clearance.
Rear Panel
This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic
equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted
municipal waste and must be collected separately.
Please contact an authorized representative of the
manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.
Rear Panel
No hazardous substance, above the maximum
concentration value, is present. Maximum concentration
values for electronic information products, as set by the
People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard
SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium,
polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated
diphenyl ether (PBDE).
Rear Panel
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above
the maximum concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic information products,
as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the
hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent
chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB),
and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “10”
indicates the number of years during which the
hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that
the use of this product will not result in any severe
environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any
assets.
Probe
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above
the maximum concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic information products,
as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the
hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent
chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB),
and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “20”
indicates the number of years during which the
hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that
the use of this product will not result in any severe
environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any
assets.
Rear Panel
Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 1-5
LABEL/SYMBOL
or
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Product Icons (Continued)
PURPOSE/MEANING
LOCATION
This product consists of devices that may contain
mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in
accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this
system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display,
contain mercury.)
Rear Panel
How to lower LCD prior to transport
Rear of the LCD monitor.
How to lock Operator Panel prior to transport
Rear of the LCD monitor.
DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object on the joint of
the monitor or monitor arm to avoid injury when moving
the monitor and monitor arm.
Rear of the LCD monitor.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-15
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 1-4
Safety Considerations
1-4-1
Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-4-2
Human Safety
Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.
Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ 9 Training are authorized to service the equipment.
1-4-3
1-16
Mechanical Safety
WARNING
Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest
position. Verify that the front brake is locked and the scanner is unable to swivel.
Verify that the rear brakes are in the locked position.
WARNING
Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be
damaged by improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage
when not in use. DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow these
precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.
WARNING
Never use a probe that has fallen to the floor. Even if it looks ok, it may be damaged.
WARNING
REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing
the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release
pedal a second time to engage the brake.
WARNING
The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the
Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel
as much as possible before moving the system.
WARNING
While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save
any patient data, images, system setups to a MOD, CD, DVD or hardcopy before
doing a software upgrade.
CAUTION
Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.
Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-4-3
Mechanical Safety (cont’d)
CAUTION
The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 171kg (376 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed
monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure
to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly
damage.
ALWAYS:
Be sure the pathway is clear.
Use slow, careful motions.
Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
CAUTION
Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the
monitor.
CAUTION
To avoid injury when you move the LCD monitor and the monitor arm, do NOT put your
finger, hand, or object on the joint of the monitor or the monitor arm.
CAUTION
Before you move or transport the system, make sure to lock the LCD monitor arm firmly and
flip down the monitor to prevent damage to the system.
CAUTION
Do NOT grab the speakers to move the monitor and the monitor arm when adjusting the LCD.
However, when you turn up the monitor from flip-down status, you can grab the upper corner
of the monitor.
CAUTION
To avoid injury or damage to the monitor, make sure there is nothing within range of the LCD
before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes people as well as things.
Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.
NOTICE
NOTE:
1-4-4
1-4-4-1
Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle:
•
Secure the unit in an upright position.
•
Lock the wheels (brake).
•
DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.
•
Place the probes in their carrying case.
•
Eject any Magneto Optical disk, CD or DVD from their drive.
Electrical Safety
Safe Practices
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The
system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved
electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total
current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.
WARNING IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER
IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST
LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-17
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-4-4-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Probes
Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:
•
Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
-
Housing
-
Cable strain relief
-
Lens
-
Seal
-
Connector pins
-
Locking mechanism
•
Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
•
Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
Section 1-5
Labels Locations
Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2, for the label locations.
Section 1-6
Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT
IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING
AND ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
1-18
WARNING
EXPLOSION WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.
OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING
Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute
parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.
Section 1-5 - Labels Locations
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 1-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Dangerous Procedure Warnings (cont’d)
WARNING
When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and
stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of
the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/
when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is
removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the
elevation assembly.
WARNING
Ensure that the system is turned off and unplugged. To verify that the Front End
Power Supply (FEPS) is in a zero energy state, wait at least 20 seconds for the charge
on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
WARNING
Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ™ 9 is un-stable, not resting on all four
Casters.
WARNING
Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel
and damage to the equipment.
WARNING
Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
WARNING
Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are
encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
WARNING
Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical MSDS.
WARNING
Do Not attempt to charge batteries other than the type included in the kit (NiMH).
Standard alkaline batteries CANNOT be recharged.
READ all safety precautions that come from the battery and battery charger
manufacturers.
WARNING
Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power
source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge
on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-19
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 1-7
Battery Safety
To avoid the risk of injury, follow the warning and cautions to make sure that the battery does not burst,
ignite, or generate heat of fumes.
CAUTION
The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the
power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark
does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
WARNING
CAUTION
•
The battery has a safety device. Do not disassemble or alter the battery.
•
Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is between 0° and 40° C (32° and
104° F).
•
Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal
objects.
•
Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.
•
Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60° C (140° F). Keep it away from fire and
other heat sources.
•
Do not charge the battery near a heat source, such as a fire or heater.
•
Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.
•
Do not drop packs from height as it may cause possible malfunction damage.
•
Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.
•
Do not use a damaged battery.
•
Do not solder a battery.
•
Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.
•
Do not contact PCM directly to prevent packs from ESD damage.
To avoid the battery bursting, igniting, or fumes from the battery causing equipment
damage, observe the following precautions:
•
•
Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.
•
If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.
•
If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears
abnormal during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it. If
you have any questions about the battery, consult GE or your local representative.
•
Store the battery between -20° C (-4° F) and 60° C (140°F).
•
Use only GE recognized batteries.
•
In case of the long term (3 months or more) storage:
•
1-20
Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.
•
Store the battery in a temperature range of 10° C (50° F) and 30° C (86°F).
•
When charging for the first time after long-term storage, recover such packs to
original performance by repeating several cycles of full charging and discharging.
When storing packs for more than 6 months, charge at least once per 6 month period to
prevent leakage and deterioration in performance due to self-discharging.
Section 1-7 - Battery Safety
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 1-8
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains
plug.
To apply Lockout/Tagout:
1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown.
2.) Shutdown the equipment.
3.) Isolate the equipment.
4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.
5.) Control all stored and residual energy.
6.) Verify isolation.
All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.
.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed
Date
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the breaker.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even
if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Section 1-9
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
an ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE:
The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 1-10
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1-10-1
What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-10-2
Compliance
The LOGIQ™ 9 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity
from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient
requirements.
For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual.
NOTE:
1-10-3
WARNING
For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in
good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all
comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention
Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD
precautions:
1. Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection
point located on the Rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector).
2. Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical
contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed
for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential
for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
1-22
Section 1-10 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 1-11
Customer Assistance
1-11-1
Contact Information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this Service Manual or in the User Manual, or if you
require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as
listed below.
Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to Milwaukee:
1.) System ID serial number.
2.) Software version.
3.) Date and time of occurrence.
4.) Sequence of events leading to issue.
5.) Is the issue repeatable?
6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
NOTE:
Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
Table 1-6
Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance
Location
Phone Number
USA
Service: On-site
1-800–437–1171
Service: Parts
1-800-558-2040
Applications Support
1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698
GE Healthcare
Ultrasound Service Engineering
9900 Innovation Drive
Wauwatosa, WI 53226
Canada
1-800-668-0732
Latin America
Europe
GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KG
Service
1-800-321-7937
Applications Support
1-262-524-5698
Phone: +33 (0) 130-831-300 (General Imaging and Cardiac)
+43 (0) 7682-3800-26 (Voluson-Logiqbook)
BeethovenstraBe 239
Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen
Fax:
+49 (0)2122-8024-31
Germany
Asia (Singapore)
GE Ultrasound Asia
Tel: +65 6291-8528
Service Department - Ultrasound
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06
Central Plaza
Fax: +65 6291-7006
Singapore 169730
Japan Support Center
Phone: 81-426-48-2940
Fax:
81-426-48-2905
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-23
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER1.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1-11-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
System Manufacturer
Table 1-7
System Manufacturer
Manufacturer
FAX Number
GE Healthcare
- GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC
9900 Innovation Drive
414-721-3865
Wauwatosa, WI 53226
USA
1-24
Section 1-11 - Customer Assistance
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 2
Site Preparation
Section 2-1
Overview
2-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 2
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ 9.
Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit.
Table 2-1
Contents in Chapter 2
Section
Description
Page Number
2-1
Overview
2-1
2-2
General Console Requirements
2-2
2-3
Facility Needs
2-6
Chapter 2 Site Preparation
2-1
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 2-2
General Console Requirements
2-2-1
Console Environmental Requirements
Table 2-2
Environmental Requirements - LOGIQ™ 9
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Heat Dissipation
10o to 35oC
-10° to 60° C
30 - 85% non-condensing
3500 BTU pr hour
NOTE:
Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = ((Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).
2-2-1-1
Cooling
The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ 9 is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed
for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300
BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.
2-2-1-2
Lighting
Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.
2-2-2
NOTE:
Electrical Requirements
GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before
the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
NOTE:
Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2-2-1
LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements
Table 2-3
2-2-2-2
Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9
Voltage
Tolerances
Current
Frequency
100-120 VAC
±10%
9.5 A
50-60 Hz
200-240 VAC
±10%
4.75 A
50-60 Hz
Inrush Current
Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power
supplies.
2-2
Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2-2-2-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Site Circuit Breaker
It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.
The LOGIQ™ 9 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and
possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment
operating on the same circuit.
2-2-2-4
Site Power Outlets
A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate
outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also
be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and
national electrical codes.
2-2-2-5
Unit Power Plug
If the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the
installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
2-2-2-6
Power Stability Requirements
Voltage drop-out
Max 10 ms.
Power Transients
(All applications)
Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including
line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.
Chapter 2 Site Preparation
2-3
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2-2-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
EMI Limitations
Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The
LOGIQ™ 9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These
sources include:
•
medical lasers,
•
scanners,
•
cauterizing guns,
•
computers,
•
monitors,
•
fans,
•
gel warmers,
•
microwave ovens,
•
light dimmers
•
portable phones.
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
See Table 2-4 for EMI Prevention tips.
Table 2-4
EMI Prevention/Abatement
EMI Rule
Details
Be aware of RF sources
Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be
required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video
broadcast signals.
Ground the unit
Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the
power cord and power outlet.
Replace all screws, RF
gaskets, covers, cores
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any
cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the
front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with
the ultrasound signals.
Replace broken RF gaskets
If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not
turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where
RF gaskets touch metal
Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF
leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
Use GE specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable
and peripherals
length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
2-4
Take care with cellular
phones
Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
Properly dress peripheral
cables
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop
the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the
frame.
Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2-2-4
Scan Probe Environmental Requirements
Table 2-5
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Environmental Requirements - Probes
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Standard Probes
10o to 40o C
-10° to 60° C
4D Probes
18o to 40o C
-10o to 50 o C
Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).
NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES
OF -20 TO +50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE
PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
2-2-5
Time and Manpower Requirements
Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six
weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.
CAUTION The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed
monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure
to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly
damage.
ALWAYS:
Be sure the pathway is clear.
Use slow, careful motions.
Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
Chapter 2 Site Preparation
2-5
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 2-3
Facility Needs
2-3-1
Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.
Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser
responsibility includes:
NOTE:
•
Procuring the materials required.
•
Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.
•
Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for
the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces
of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The
products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special
engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the
requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified
personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
2-6
Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2-3-2
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Required Features
GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before
the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
NOTE:
NOTE:
2-3-3
Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
•
Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.
•
Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling
•
Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
The LOGIQ™ 9 has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on-board
peripherals.
•
Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer
•
Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit
•
Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack)
•
Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)
Desirable Features
•
Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide
•
Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
•
Sink with hot and cold water
•
Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
•
Emergency oxygen supply
•
Storage for linens and equipment
•
Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
•
Dual level lighting (bright and dim)
•
Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals
Chapter 2 Site Preparation
2-7
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion
Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan
2-8
Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2-3-5
2-3-5-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Networking Setup Requirements
Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection)
None.
2-3-5-2
Scanner Connected to Hospital’s Network
Supported networks: DICOM Network (option)
2-3-5-3
Purpose of the DICOM Network Function
DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient
information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to
workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring
images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while
scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at
a lower cost.
2-3-5-4
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements
To configure the LOGIQ™ 9 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator
must provide some necessary information.
Use the Connectivity Setup Worksheet on 3-22 to record the required information that must include:
2-3-5-5
•
A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ 9.
•
The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.
•
The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
LOGIQ™ 9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and
the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors.
InSite Requirements
•
Network 10/100 or 10/100/1G Interface.
•
Optional analog phone line for older products.
Chapter 2 Site Preparation
2-9
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER2.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
This page was intentionally left blank.
2-10
Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3
System Setup
Section 3-1
Overview
3-1-1
The Purpose of Chapter 3
This chapter contains information needed to unpack and set up the unit. Included are procedures to
receive, unpack and configure the equipment. System operation is verified at the factory.
Table 3-1
Contents in Chapter 3
Section
Description
Page Number
3-1
Overview
3-1
3-2
Set Up Reminders
3-2
3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
3-4
3-4
Preparing for Set Up
3-6
3-5
Completing the Setup
3-8
3-6
System Configuration
3-11
3-7
Available Probes
3-21
3-8
Software/Option Configuration
3-21
3-9
Connectivity Setup Worksheet
3-22
3-10
Before Starting a Software Upgrade
3-23
3-11
Loading Base Image Software
3-23
3-12
Loading Application Software
3-23
3-13
System Setup
3-23
3-14
Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color
3-24
3-15
Paperwork
3-25
3-16
Checks
3-26
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-1
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-2
Set Up Reminders
3-2-1
Average Set Up Time
Table 3-2
3-2-2
Average Set Up Time
Description
Average Set Up Time
Unpacking the scanner
0.5 hours
Scanner wo/options
0.5 hours
Dependant on the required configuration
DICOM Option
0.5 - 2.0 hours
Dependant on the configuration amount
Comments
Set Up Warnings
1.) Since the LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) without options, two people are required to
unpack it. Two people are also required for installing any additional items in excess of 16 kg (35 lbs).
2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or
panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, turn off the breaker, and unplug the power cord.
Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.
3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to
acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5°C increment its temperature is
below 10°C or above 40°C.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site
may cause the system to be damaged.
Table 3-3
Acclimation Time
°C
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
°F
140
131
122
113
104
96
86
77
68
59
50
41
32
23
14
5
-4
-13
-22
-31
-40
hrs
8
6
4
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
3-2-2-1
Brake Pedal Operation
WARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the
release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a
second time to engage the brake.
3-2-2-2
Operator I/O Panel Position
If weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in its extended position, the console could tip over
WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the
Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as
much as possible before moving the system.
3-2
Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-2-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Safety Reminders
DANGER
WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH
THE UNIT!
CAUTION
Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever
a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted.
CAUTION
If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate
to its operating environment.
CAUTION
To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use
a three- to two-prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
CAUTION
Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is
present.
CAUTION
Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires
a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on-board peripherals do not cause the
unit to draw more than 14.0 amps.
CAUTION
Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place.
System performance and cooling require this.
CAUTION
OPERATOR MANUAL(S)
The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and
kept near the unit for quick reference.
CAUTION
ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD
Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ 9 probe is within FDA limits,
avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-3
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
CAUTION Two people are needed to unpack the unit because of its weight.
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result
in injury or damage or both.
Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted or
pushed up or down a slope.
CAUTION Remember to use relevant Personal Protecting Equipment during packing/unpacking. Check
with your local EHS representative.
Table 3-4
Unpacking Procedure
Step
Task
1.
Open the four hinges on each door
2.
Remove the doors at both ends of the box
3.
Place the front door against the rear edge of the pallet. The front door can be used as a ramp.
Front Door
used as ramp.
4.
3-4
Be sure to place the
ramp (front door) as
illustrated here.
Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanner’s keyboard and all the filling
material, from the wooden box.
Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Unpacking Procedure (Continued)
Step
5.
Task
Press once on the swivel lock to release the brake.
Swivel Lock
Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment.
6.
Carefully move the scanner out of the wooden box, down the ramp.
7.
Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit.
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-5
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
10/12/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-4
Preparing for Set Up
3-4-1
Verify Customer Order
Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items
that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.
3-4-2
3-4-2-1
Physical Inspection
System Voltage Settings
Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage.
The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ™ 9 Scanner are found on a label to the right of the Power switch
and External I/O, on the rear of the system.
3-4-2-2
Rating Plate
NOTE:
This Rating Plate example is a representation of several designs used.
GE Healthcare
LOGIQ 9
CISPR 11
GROUP 1 CLASS A
200 kg
Rating Plate
Figure 3-2 Rating Plate Example
3-6
Section 3-4 - Preparing for Set Up
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
10/12/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-4-2-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label
This ETL label is required for all USA systems.
LOGIQ 9
GE Healthcare
ETL Label
CISPR 11
GROUP 1 CLASS A
200 kg
Figure 3-3 ETL Label Example
WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST
LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
3-4-2-4
Video Formats
Check that the video format is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL.
3-4-3
EMI Protection
This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by
this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured
before the unit is put into operation.
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-7
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-5
Completing the Setup
3-5-1
Power On / Boot Up
NOTE:
After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be
able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
3-5-1-1
Scanner Power On
1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.
3.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage.
Never use an adapter that would circumvent the safety ground.
4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is
distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards,
Peripherals and the Back-end Processor.
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the On / Off switch on the Control panel (Figure 3-5) indicates
the Back End Processor is in standby mode:
For BT03 systems and prior, the On / Off switch illuminates amber.
For BT04 systems and later, the On / Off switch blinks amber and green.
3-8
Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-5-1-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Back-end Processor Boot Up
1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once.
When the On / Off switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts
and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.
No status messages are displayed during this process.
On / Off switch
Figure 3-5 On / Off switch
3-5-2
Power Off / Shutdown
NOTE:
After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be
able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
3-5-2-1
Back-end Processor Power Down
1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
Figure 3-6 System Exit Menu
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-9
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-5-2-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Scanner Shutdown
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On
1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the system.
2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner.
NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the
uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the
system.
NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file
corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.
3-5-3
Transducer Connection and Removal
1.) To connect a transducer to one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:
a.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever is in the horizontal position.
b.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle
mating surface.
c.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place.
2.) To disconnect a transducer from one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:
a.) Turn the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position.
b.) Separate the transducer connector from the receptacle mating surface.
NOTE:
3-10
It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.
Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-6
System Configuration
3-6-1
3-6-1-1
System Specifications
Physical Dimensions
The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit are summarized in Table 3-5 and Table 3-6.
Table 3-1 lists the size of LOGIQ™ 9, with monitor and on-board peripherals.
Table 3-5
Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ™ 9
Height
3-6-1-2
Minimum
Maximum
127 cm / 50 inches
160.7 cm / 63.25 inches
Depth
64 cm / 25.2 inches
89.9 cm / 35.4 inches
Console Weight
Table 3-6
3-6-1-3
Width
Weight of LOGIQ™ 9 and Monitors, With and Without Peripherals
Model
With Peripherals - kg [lbs]
Without Peripherals - kg [lbs]
LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT
206 [454]
185 [408]
LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT,
Upgraded to LCD
(includes counterweight)
206 [454]
185 [408]
LOGIQ™ 9 with LCD
192 [423]
168 [370]
Acoustic Noise Output:
Less than 70dB(A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2.
3-6-2
Electrical Specifications
Table 3-7
Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9
Voltage
Tolerances
Current
Frequency
100-120 VAC
±10%
9.5 A
50-60 Hz
200-240 VAC
±10%
4.75 A
50-60 Hz
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-11
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
On-Board Optional Peripherals
Table 3-8
Approved On-Board Peripherals
Device
Manufacturer
Model
Video Signal
B/W Video Printer
SONY
UP-895MDW
NA
B/W Video Printer
SONY
UP-D897MD
NA
Video Cassette Recorder
Mitsubishi
HS_MD3000U
HS_MD3000E
NTSC
PAL
Video Cassette Recorder
SONY
SVO-9500MD
SVO-9500-MDP
NTSC
PAL
UP-51MD
Color Video Printer
SONY
UP-D21
UP-D55
UP-D23MD
3-12
Section 3-6 - System Configuration
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system)
Figure 3-8 External I/O Panel Labels (Prior to BT03)
1
8
2
9
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
7
14
Figure 3-9 External I/O Panel Connectors
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-13
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) (cont’d)
Table 3-9
Item
External I/O Connector Descriptions
Connector Name
Table Number
Description
1
Audio Output (Left)
RCA Phono Jack
2
Audio Output (Right)
RCA Phono Jack
3
Trigger Output
BNC Connector
4
Footswitch
5
RS232 Com1
6
Expose 1
Table 3-11
Mini-phone Jack
7
Expose 2
Table 3-11
Mini-phone Jack
8
Modem Connection
Table 3-12
RJ-11 with global adapter kit for connection
9
Composite Video Out
10
B/W Video Out
11
S-Video Output
Table 3-13
4 pin mini-DIN
12
S-VGA Output
Table 3-14
DSUB-HD22 15 Pin female
13
USB (1)
Table 3-15
14
Ethernet Connection
Table 3-16
3-14
Table 3-10
Hirose Electric Co. RM12BRB-5S,
Footswich transport shelf is in the back at the bottom
DSUB 9 pin male
BNC Connector, Color Output
BNC Connector, Black and White Output
Section 3-6 - System Configuration
RJ-45 Connector
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
External I/O Pin Outs
Table 3-10
Table 3-11
Table 3-12
Table 3-13
Footswitch Connector
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
1
Foot 1
Left switch
2
Floating Ground
Ground
3
Foot 2
Center switch
4
Floating Ground
Ground
5
Foot 3
Right switch
Remote Expose 1 & 2 Connectors
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
1
SHUTTER/PRINT
Print command to external device
2
Signal GND
Ground
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
2
TEL L4
Telephone L4
3
TEL L2
Telephone L2
4
TEL L1
Telephone L1
5
TEL L3
Telephone L3
Others
NC
Non-connection
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
1
SVIDEO OUT/IN YG
Y (Luma) GND
2
SVIDEO OUT/IN CG
C (Chroma) GND
3
SVIDEO OUT/IN Y
Y (Luma) SIGNAL
4
SVIDEO OUT/IN C
C (Chroma) SIGNAL
Modem, RJ11 Modular 6 Pin
S-Video Connector, 4 Pin
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-15
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-4-1
External I/O Pin Outs (cont’d)
Table 3-14
Table 3-15
Table 3-16
3-16
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
S-VGA Connector, Shrinked Sub-D 15 Pin
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
1
VGA OUT1 R
Red
2
VGA OUT1 G
Green
3
VGA OUT1 B
Blue
4, 9,11,12,15
N/C
N/C
5, 6, 7, 8, 10
GND
GND
13
VGA OUT1 HS
H Sync
14
VGA OUT1 VS
V Sync
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
1
VCC
USB Power Supply
2
- Data
USB Data (-)
3
+ Data
USB Data (+)
4
GND
USB Power Ground
USB (A) Connector
Ethernet Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
1
ETHER TD
Ethernet RD+
2
ETHER TD
Ethernet RD-
3
ETHER RD
Ethernet TD+
6
ETHER RD
Ethernet TD-
Others
NC
Non-connection
Section 3-6 - System Configuration
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Other I/O Ports (Front of system)
3
4
1
2
5
6
Figure 3-10 Front Connectors
Table 3-17
Front I/O Connector Descriptions
Item
Connector Name
Description
1
USB
On BEP 3.x/4.x Only
2
USB
On BEP 3.x/4.x Only
3
CW
CW probe connection port (optional)
4
4D
4D Probe connection port (optional)
5
Probe Connectors
The two left most connectors are recommended for
4D Probe placement
6
USB
On upper console for wired voice connection Only
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-17
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-5
Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d)
Table 3-18
Table 3-19
Table 3-20
3-18
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CW Connector, J1 (Optional)
Pin No
Output Signal
Description
2
DOPIN
COAX CENTER, RED JACKET
3
DOPIN GND
COAX SHIELD, RED JACKET
5
ID0
R1-2
6
PCW
COAX CENTER, WHT JACKET
7
PCW GND
COAX SHIELD, WHT JACKET
8
ID1
R1-1
10
OUTER SHIELD
Shell
OUTER SHIELD
4D Connector (Optional)
Pin No
Signal
4
GND
8
SIN_DRV
7
SIN_RTN
2
ACTIVE
5
COS_RTN
6
COS_DRV
3
HALL1
Flock of Birds, Small Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)
Pin No
Signal
1
EEC
2
EXC_RTN
3
Rx_Y
4
Rx_X
5
Rx_RTN
6
Rx_Z
7
EXC
8
EED
Section 3-6 - System Configuration
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d)
Table 3-21
Flock of Birds, Large Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)
Pin No
Signal
1
TYRTNO
2
EECO_TX
3
EED_TX
4
PWM_EMI
5
TXRTN0
6
TZRTN0
7
VCC_
8
GND
Center
TYRTNO
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-19
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
3-6-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Video Specification
Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the
LOGIQ™ 9.
NOTE:
800x600 75hz is the only output available for external video connectors
Table 3-22
3-20
Video Specifications
CRT
External Video
Connection
CRT and LCD
LCD
Timing Parameter
1024x768
75Hz
800x600
75Hz
1280x1024
60Hz
Horizontal Rate [kHz]
60.02
46.88
64.00
Horizontal Period [µs]
16.66
21.33
15.62
Pixel Clock [MHz]
78.75
49.50
108.00
H Blank Width [µs]
3.66
5.17
3.77
H Sync Width [µs]
1.22
1.62
1.03
H Front Porch [µs]
0.20
0.32
0.44
Active Horizontal Period [µs]
13.00
16.16
11.85
Vertical Rate [Hz]
75.03
75.00
60.00
Vertical Period [ms]
13.33
13.33
16.67
V Sync Width [lines=ms]
32=0.53
25=0.53
not available at
printing
V Front Porch [lines=µs]
3=50.00
3=64.00
.016ms
Equalization Gate [lines=µs]
1=16.66
1=21.3
N/A
Lines: Field/Frame
800
625
1066
Active Lines/Frame
768
600
1024
Section 3-6 - System Configuration
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-7
Available Probes
See Specifications in the LOGIQ™ 9 User Reference Manual for probes and intended use.
See Chapter 9 "Renewal Parts" on page 9-1, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or
replacement probes.
Section 3-8
Software/Option Configuration
Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on
configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date
Format.
For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter
16, Customizing Your System.
For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-9
Connectivity Setup Worksheet
Site System Information
Comments:
Floor:
Site:
Dept:
Room:
Type:
LOGIQ SN:
REV:
CONTACT INFORMATION
Name
Title
Phone
E-Mail Address
TCP/IP Settings
Name - AE Title:
IP Settings
Remote Archive Setup
IP Address:
Remote Archive IP:
Subnet Mask:
Remote Archive Name:
Default Gateway:
Services (Destination Devices)
Device Type
Manufacturer
Name
IP Address
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3-22
Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup Worksheet
Port
AE Title
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-10
Before Starting a Software Upgrade
This information has been moved, see
Section 8-6 "Before Starting a Software Load" on page 8-17
Section 3-11
Loading Base Image Software
This information has been moved, see
Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26
Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or
Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38
Section 3-12
Loading Application Software
This information has been moved, see
Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44
Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49, or
Section 8-13 "Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-56
Section 3-13
System Setup
This section has been moved - See Section 8-15 on page 8-65
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-23
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-14
Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color
3-14-1
Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)
1.) Attach the USB cable from the printer to the USB port on the back of the ultrasound system. The
New Hardware detected pop-up will be displayed briefly.
2.) If you’re attaching an HP Deskjet 990Cxi or 970Cxi printer or HP Deskjet 6122, the system should
immediately recognize the newly attached printer and automatically install and configure the printer
for you without any additional user intervention.
On Systems Running Software prior to R4.x.x follow the steps in 3-14-2 on page 3-24.
3-14-2
3-14-2-1
Printer Set Up (R2.x)
To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software
If you must connect the printer in the following order:
Base Image Software -> Printer -> Application software, complete the following steps:
1.) Install the Base Image Software.
2.) Plug in the printer USB cable and the system will recognize the device.
3.) Load the Application Software.
.
3-24
Section 3-14 - Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-15
Paperwork
NOTE:
3-15-1
During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the
peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all
relevant safety and user information is available during operation and service of the complete system.
Product Locator Installation
Upon completion of the system set up, complete and mail the Product Locator Installation card.
NOTE:
The Product Locator Installation card may vary from the Product Locator cards below.
Figure 3-11 Product Locator Installation Card
3-15-2
User Manual(s)
Check that the correct User Manual(s), for the system and software revision, is included with the
installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE
Sales Representative for availability.
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-25
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER3.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 3-16
Checks
Perform all functional checks.
3-26
Section 3-16 - Checks
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4
Functional Checks
Section 4-1
Overview
4-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 4
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner
diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. System operation is
verified at the factory.
Table 4-1
Chapter 4 Contents
Section
Description
Page Number
4-1
Overview
4-1
4-2
General Procedure
4-2
4-3
Software Configuration Checks
4-23
4-4
Peripheral Checks
4-24
4-5
Mechanical Function Checks
4-25
NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the LOGIQ™ 9
Quick Guide / User Guide (see below).
Table 4-2
4-1-2
Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers
Application Software Version
Direction Number
R2.X
2309820-100
R3.X
2384458-100
R4.X
5113779-100
R6.X
5140807-100
R7.X
5173872-100
R9.X
5338270-100 (User Guide)
Required Equipment
•
An empty (blank) MO Disk (If system has a Magneto-Optical Drive) or blank CD-R or DVD-R.
•
At least one transducer. See “Probes” on page 1-70. for an overview.
(normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-1
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 4-2
General Procedure
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The
covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed
4-2
Date
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the breaker.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even
if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-1
4-2-1-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
System Features
Control Panel
15
2
5
1
19
18
11
17
16
14
3
6
4
14
7
13
8
10
9
12
Figure 4-1 Control Panel Tour
1. Touch Panel and Controls
11. Depth
2. Touch Panel Brightness Control
12. Imaging Feature Keys
3. Video
13. Freeze and Print Keys
4. Audio On/Off and Volume
14. Probe Holder
5. TGC
15. Gel Holder
6. Reverse
16. On/Off Switch
7. Additional Feature Keys
17. 4D probe holder insert
8. Keyboard
18. USB Connector - for wired mic only
9. Mode/Gain Keys
19. Subwoofer Volume knob - retain settings set at factory
10. Imaging/Measurement Keys
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-3
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-1-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Touch Panel
Figure 4-2 Touch Panel Display Tour - BT06
Table 4-3
NOTE:
Touch Panel Display
1. Patient
Enters Patient screen.
2. Scan
Enters scanning mode screen.
3. Reports
Activates default report and Touch Panel of report choices.
4. End Exam
Activates Image Management and Touch Panel with end of exam options.
5. Utility
Activates the configuration system.
6. Preset
Selects the application to use.
7. Probe Indicator
Indicates and selects the probes.
Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu is selected.
At the bottom of the Touch Panel, there are five combination rotary dials/push buttons. The functionality
of these rotaries changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu. Press the button to switch
between controls (as with Focus Position/Number), or rotate the dial to adjust the value.
4-4
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-1-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Monitor Display
Figure 4-3 Monitor Display Tour
Table 4-4
Monitor Display Features
1. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, Operator Identification.
2. Patient Name, Patient Identification.
3. Power Output Readout
4. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker.
5. Image Preview.
6. Gray/Color Bar.
7. Cine Gauges
8. Worksheet/Direct Report
9. Measurement Summary Window.
10. Image.
11. Measurement Calipers.
12. Measurement Results Window + Direct Report
13. Image Clipboard.
14. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset.
15. Imaging Parameters by Mode.
16. Focal Zone Indicator.
17. TGC.
18. Depth Scale.
19. Body Pattern.
20. Image Management Icons: Active Images, Delete, Previous/Next
Image and Menu.
21. Current date and time, Caps Lock: (lit when on), network
connection indicator (PC=connected, PC with X=not connected),
Human face (VoiceScan), iLinq, system messages display.
22. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, M&A (Measurement and
Analysis), Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-5
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power On / Boot Up
DANGER
ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER
NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER
ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables, and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.
NOTE:
Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five -5- seconds. When turning OFF the
Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.
NOTE:
When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push
the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.
NOTE:
If the unit has been unplugged or main breaker in the OFF state for more than 3 to 5 days, the unit may
not boot, or may beep when turned on.
NOTE:
After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be
able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
NOTE:
On BEP3.X and BEP4.X, there is a blinking stand-by indicator. When the ON/OFF switch blinks
between green and amber, the system is in STANDBY.
4-2-2-1
To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner
Connecting the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and
compliance with electrical safety requirements.
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the power switch is turned OFF.
2.) Verify that the onsite mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
3.) Verify the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the scanner is OFF.
4.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible damage.
5.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
6.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.
4-6
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power On / Boot Up (cont’d)
7.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet, allowing sufficient slack so that the
unit can be moved slightly.
8.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 4-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to
the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals, the Back End
Processor and the Front End Power Supply.
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the Control panel illuminates amber,
indicating the system is in System Ready Mode.
NOTE:
If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF
position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep
when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow
the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time.
4-2-2-2
To Boot Up Back End Processor
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once.
The Back-End Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No
status messages are displayed during this process.
ON / OFF Switch
Figure 4-5 ON/OFF switch for Back End Processor Boot Up
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-7
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Standby Mode
Use Standby Mode to decrease the power off/on time while transporting system for a portable exam.
NOTE:
DO NOT put the system in Standby Mode more than 20 times in a row. You should power off
the system daily.
4-2-3-1
To Place System in Standby Mode
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.
2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.
The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.
3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power
cable or switching off the breaker.
The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:
NOTE:
-
If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power On/Off button starts blinking on/off.
-
If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15
seconds.
Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch will blink while the system is in Standby Mode. Because
of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.
4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall.
The system beeps.
NOTE:
DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged, this will turn the system off.
5.) Transport the system as needed and plug it back in within 15 minutes.
If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system
shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.
NOTE:
It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is
six months.To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the
ON position.
NOTE:
If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in
the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not
boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the
ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use
standby during this time.
See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.
4-2-3-2
To Wake the System from Standby Mode
1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than.25 seconds. If you press the On/Off switch too long,
the system will shutdown. It takes about 45 seconds for the system to become fully functional.
4-8
NOTE:
If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of
Standby Mode.
NOTE:
Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Off / Shutdown
NOTE:
After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be
able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
4-2-4-1
To Power Off Back-End Processor
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
3.) Allow the system to close files and shutdown. Wait until the standby light turns amber.
Figure 4-6 System Exit Menu for Back End Processor Power Off
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-9
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-4-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
To Shut Down Scanner
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 4-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
.
NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the
uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the
system.
NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file
corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.
WARNING Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable is required before servicing or relocating the
scanner.
For USA only:
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the
electrical Mains Power Cable plug.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed
Date
Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the breaker.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even
if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
1.) From the rear of the system, switch OFF the Circuit Breaker.
2.) Slip the Cable Clip off the shoulders on the molded plug, then disconnect the Mains Power Cable
from the scanner.
4-10
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-5
4-2-5-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Probe/Connectors Usage
To Connect a Probe
1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not
resting on the floor.
4-2-5-2
To Activate a Probe
Select the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the Touch Panel.
The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode
and selected exam are used automatically.
4-2-5-3
To Deactivate a Probe
When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode.
1.) Press the Freeze key.
2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for
complete probe cleaning instructions.)
3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder.
Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
4-2-5-4
To Disconnect a Probe
Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active
probe.
1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of
the probe port.
2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of
the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.
3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-11
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-6
4-2-6-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Using CINE
To Activate CINE
1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE.
2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.
4-2-6-2
To Omit Images
1.) Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.
4-2-6-3
To Restore Images
1.) To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.
4-2-6-4
To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame
1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame.
2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.
4-2-6-5
To Start Frame/End Frame
1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial
to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.
2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the
left to move backward through the CINE Loop.
4-2-6-6
To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed
1.) Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.
4-2-6-7
To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE
1.) To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select B Only.
2.) To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select TL Only.
3.) To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press Cine Mode Selection and
select B/TL.
4-2-6-8
To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame
1.) Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.
4-12
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-7
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide
For Image Management functionality, refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide. It talks about
several topics:
• Clipboard
• TCP/IP
• Printing Images
• Services (Destinations)
• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image
• Buttons
• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation
• Views
• Starting an Exam
• Verifying and Pinging a Device
• Configuring Connectivity
Table 4-5
Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers
Application Software Version
Direction Number
R2.X
2309820-100
R3.X
2384458-100
R4.X
5113779-100
R6.X
5140807-100
R7.X
5173872-100
R9.X
5338270-100 (User Guide)
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-13
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-8
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
System B/M-Mode Checks
For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, the Quick Guide / User Guide will
familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.
Figure 4-8
Table 4-6
B/M-Mode Functions
Control
Description
Power Output (Acoustic Power)
Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%.
Values greater than 0.1 are displayed
Dynamic Range
Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of
contrast.
Focus Number and Position
Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam
for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of
the image.
Rejection
Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude
before it will be processed).
Edge Enhance
Brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding
to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.
Frame Average
Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.
Colorize
Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.
Gray Map
Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.
Rotation (Up/Down)
Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.
Frequency
Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.
Frame Rate/Resolution
Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.
B Flow
Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative hemodynamics in vascular structures.
Sensitivity/PRI
Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal.
Background On/Off
Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background Off lets you view just flow information.
Sweep Speed
Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.
4-14
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
System CFM and PWD Checks
Figure 4-9 CFM and PWD Functions
Table 4-7
CFM and PWD Functions
Baseline
Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing.
PRF/Wall Filter
Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate
PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is
indicated on the display.
Angle Correct
Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between
the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured
Threshold
Assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops.
Map
Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the
resultant map.
Invert
Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. red away (negative velocities) and blue
toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted.
Packet Size
Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector.
Quick Angle Correct
Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees
Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under.
Doppler Display Formats
In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or
time-motion with B-Mode reference.
In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority
or equal priority.
Sample Volume Gate Length
Sizes the sample volume gate
Scan Area
Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving the probe
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-15
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-10
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Basic Measurements
NOTE:
The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.
4-2-10-1
To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth
1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most
anterior point (tissue depth).
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) Move the Trackball to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most
posterior point (tissue depth).
5.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.
NOTE:
Before you complete a measurement:
•
To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.
•
To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press
Clear once.
NOTE:
To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.
NOTE:
After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point,
but not data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.
4-2-10-2
To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse)
1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper.
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper.
5.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.
NOTE:
Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.
6.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers).
7.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size,
turn the Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction.
8.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.
9.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.
NOTE:
4-16
Before you complete a measurement:
•
To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is
displayed to restart the measurement.
•
To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-10-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Worksheets
Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations.
There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected
from the Measurement Touch Panel.
4-2-10-4
Report Pages
Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages.
Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-17
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-11
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive)
4-2-11-1
For BT03 and prior
The onboard 3.5 inch Magnetic Optical disk drive supports the following densities:
-
Standard: 640MB; 540MB; 230MB; and 128MB
-
Overwrite: 1.3GB, 640MB; and 540MB
Magnetic Optical Drive (MOD)
Figure 4-10 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT03 and prior
4-18
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
Eject Button
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-11-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
For BT04 and later
The LOGIQ™ 9 supports the portable, external Fujitsu DynaMO 1300 U2 Pocket Magnetic Optical (MO)
drive to read old media and to use up unused MO disks.
NOTE:
The MO drive is intended to be a temporary storage solution only and NOT for everyday use.
For permanent storage, ALWAYS use the DVD drive that is shipped with your system.
Figure 4-11 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later
To Connect the Portable MO Drive
1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. The MO drive is powered by the USB port;
therefore, no power cord is needed.
2.) Set the MO drive inside the side Peripheral Storage Area, next to the image printer. Make sure the
MO drive sits far enough inside the storage area, but close enough to reach while plugged into the
USB port.
3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the back of the system.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-19
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-11-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
For BT04 and later (cont’d)
Alternative Site for MO Drive. If you have a printer that takes up the entire storage area, there is an
alternative site above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. To connect the portable MO drive to the
LOGIQ 9 system:
1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive.
2.) Set the MO drive above the Front Peripheral Storage Area, far enough away from the edge.
3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front of the system.
Figure 4-12 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later
CAUTION DO NOT connect the MO drive to the USB port adjacent to the top of the Control Panel.
If you intend to use the MO drive semi-permanently, attach the MO drive to the system using velcro, or
other secure method (not supplied by GE).
DO NOT lock the Control Panel into place while the MO Drive is located above the Front Peripheral
Storage Area. DO NOT load any CDs that accompany the MO device.
4-20
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-11-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Using the MOD
1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels
which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set
so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed).
2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.
NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and
the MOD could break.
3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. In some cases disk ejection is automatic.
Manual ejection methods are listed below in preferred order from best (1) to worst (4).
a.) When in Archive Menu, use the softkey choice –or–
click Image Presets up, then click the left softkey switch up for ARCHIVE, then toggle the
switch under EJECT MOD.
b.) Press the Eject switch on the MOD while system is ON.
c.) Press and hold the Eject switch while the system is booting.
d.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the Eject switch while
system power is OFF.
NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator
unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the
system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection
methods.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-2-12
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
USB Drives
Connect only one USB drive (USB HDD/USB flash drive) to the system in total. DO NOT connect two
or more devices at the same time.
NOTE:
Do not create multiple partitions. Use USB Drive with single partition.
The USB Flash Drive is an ESD-sensitive device. GE only supports the NDL 256MByte 066E0690 USB
Flash Drive.
CAUTION Before removing the USB Flash Drive from the USB port, press Eject (F3) and select USB Drive from
the pull-down menu to disconnect the USB Flash Drive.
4-2-13
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
The Backup and Restore procedures vary based on the application software that is installed. For the
appropriate Backup and Restore information, see the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide
4-22
Section 4-2 - General Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 4-3
Software Configuration Checks
Table 4-8
Software Configuration Checks
Step
Task to do
1.
Verify Date and Time is correct
2.
Verify that Location (Hospital Name) is correct
3.
Verify Language settings are correct
4.
Verify assignment of Printer Keys
5.
Verify all of the customer’s options are set up correctly
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
Notes
4-23
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 4-4
Peripheral Checks
Check that peripherals work as described below:
Table 4-9
Peripheral Checks
Step
Task to do
Notes
Press Freeze.
Stops image acquisition.
Press (Print 1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or
(Print 4) on the Control Panel
Prints image displayed on the screen on B&W or Color printer,
depending on the key assignment configuration
3.
Press VIDEO on the Control Panel.
Starts the video counter at a different point:
4.
Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. Displays the Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window
5.
Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the
counter number in the counter field.
Displays number
6.
Press Set Counter to save the change.
Saves number
7.
Press VIDEO on the Control Panel
Returns to the scanning mode
8.
Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.
9.
Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.
10.
Press video on the Control Panel and the
assignable play
11.
Performs actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind
Use the Assignable keys on the Control Panel or fast forward.
Updates the video status icon accordingly
12.
While in playback mode, use the Trackball to
Searches on the tape
adjust the video playback speed and scroll
through the record.
13.
Press the assignable PAUSE
14.
Press Freeze while playing back a recorded
session.
1.
2.
Starts Recording
4-24
Displays a red dot in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that
recording has begun
Stops recording
Changes the video status icon to (Pause)
Plays back an examination
Stops the tape at the desired frame.
Stores the last few seconds of a recorded sequence as a cineloop.
Enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section
(see 4-2-6 for further information on cineloop operation).
Section 4-4 - Peripheral Checks
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 4-5
Mechanical Function Checks
4-5-1
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor
Figure 4-13
Step
Task
Note(s)
1.
Pull handle up under the platform towards you to
release horizontal lock
Maneuvers the Display Platform horizontally at
present level of height
Pull handle at left hand grip toward you to release the
Vertical Lock
Maneuvers the Display Platform up and down
(between the vertical end stops) as long as you pull
the handle toward you
Pull both handles toward you to release both Vertical
and Horizontal locks
Maneuvers the Display Platform both horizontally and
vertically as long as you keep pulling these handles
toward you
2.
3.
Table 4-10
Standard Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-25
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-5-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)
Hold here for
Steps 1 and 2
Hold here for
Step 3
Hold here for
Step 3
Hold here for
Steps 1 and 2
Figure 4-14 Operator Movement
Step
1.
2.
Task
Note(s)
Move Up/Down
Use both hands, one at the top 17” LCD the 17” LCD and
one at the bottom, to adjust the LCD up and down,
Tilt Forward/Back
Use both hands, one at the top of the 17” LCD and one at
the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.
Move Left/Right
Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 17”
LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the
screen left and right.
3.
Table 4-11
4-26
17” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-5-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
Hold here for
Steps 1 and 2
Hold here for
Step 3
Figure 4-15 Operator Movement
Step
1
Task
Note(s)
Tilt Forward/Back
Use both hands, one at the top of the 19” LCD and one at the
bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.
Move Left/Right
Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 19” LCD
and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left
and right.
2.
Table 4-12
19” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
Chapter 4 Functional Checks
4-27
1/18/10
CHAPTER4.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
4-5-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Brakes and Direction Locks Checks
Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.
Table 4-13
Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions
Step
Task
1.
Press on pedal no. 2
Note(s)
Engages the brakes in full lock
2.
Press on pedal no.1
Releases the brake
3.
Press on pedal no.1
Engages swivel lock.
You may need to move the system around a
little to get the wheels to lock into the locked
direction.
4.
Press on pedal no. 2
Releases swivel lock
NOTE:
4-5-5
The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main
brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the
swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from
rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated
in step 1.
Site Log
Use the site log found on Section 10-9 "Site Log" on page 10-29 to record site visits.
4-28
Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
5-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 5
This chapter explains LOGIQ™ 9’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem
function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes.
Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5
Section
Description
Page Number
5-1
Overview
5-1
5-2
General Information
5-2
5-3
Front End Processor
5-7
5-4
Back End Processor (BEP 1)
5-22
5-5
Back End Processor (BEP 2)
5-27
5-6
Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
5-34
5-7
Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
5-39
5-8
BEP Power On Path
5-44
5-9
BEP Power Off Path
5-45
5-10
Operator Console Control PWA
5-46
5-11
Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)
5-54
5-12
Internal I/O
5-55
5-13
Top Console
5-63
5-14
Monitor
5-64
5-15
External I/O
5-65
5-16
Peripherals
5-68
5-17
Modem and USB Modem
5-69
5-18
Power Distribution
5-71
5-19
Mechanical Descriptions
5-76
5-20
Air Flow Control
5-79
5-21
Service Platform
5-79
5-22
4D Option
5-91
5-23
Continuous Wave Doppler Option
5-96
5-24
PCI CW Doppler PWA card
5-97
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-1
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-2
General Information
LOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input
sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:
-
B-Mode
-
M-Mode
-
Color Flow Mode (CFM)
-
Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps
-
PW Doppler with high PRF
-
B-Flow Mode
-
M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging
LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the
Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard
drive on power up.
Name Plate
Monitor
Monitor Controls
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Operator Console
Front Cover
VCR
B/W Printer
3.5” MOD
CD-ROM
or DVD
Probe Connector
Backend Processor Chassis
Swivel Lock
Front Bumper
Brake Release
Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components
5-2
Section 5-2 - General Information
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 5-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
General Information (cont’d)
17”LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust)
Operator Console
VCR
Front Cover
B/W Printer
Probe Connector
CD-ROM
or DVD
Backend Processor
Chassis
Front Bumper
Swivel Lock
Brake Release
Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with LCD Option - Major Components
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-3
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 5-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
General Information (cont’d)
19” LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Gel Warmer
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust)
Touchscreen/Display
Operator Console
Figure 5-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD
5-4
Section 5-2 - General Information
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-2-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Block Diagram
BACK END PROCESSOR
USER INTERFACE
ECG Patient Interface
AC POWER
3.5" MOD
17" Monitor
OP I/O PANEL
UPS
Hard Drive
CD-ROM
ATX POWER SUPPLY
POWER ON/OFF (RESET*)
PC MOTHERBOARD
SONY COLOR PRINTER
AGP
VIDEO
UP-2900MD
PC2IO
PCVIC
PCI
VIDEO
SOUND
CARD
FLOCK
OF
BIRDS
(optional)
PC2IP
Ethernet
SONY B/W PRINTER
UP-890MD
USB Connection
Video Outputs
SVO-9500MD
Network Connection
SONY VCR
FRONT END PROCESSOR
FRONT END BACKPLANE
FEPS
SCB
EQ4
BMP
TD7
TD6
TD5
TD3
TD4
TD1
TD2
EXTERNAL I/O
TD0
PCI CABLE
FRONTPLANE
AC CONTROLLER
115Vac
XFMR BOX
TO MODEM
230Vac
XDIF
INTERNAL I/O
RFAMP
DOPPLER
PROBES
TO MONITOR
MODEM
230Vac
115Vac
TO CARD RACK
230Vac
TO PC
230Vac
TO PERIPHERIALS
115 or 230Vac
TO OUTLET
Figure 5-4 LOGIQ™ 9 Simple Block Diagram
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-5
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-2-2
5-2-2-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Dataflow Control Description
Data Sets
Each scan mode will produce data to a corresponding data set in the Image Memory. The data sets are
represented in ring-buffers. Each active data set will be allocated to one of the following types of
acquisition data:
5-6
•
2-D tissue data
•
Doppler data
•
M-mode data
•
2-D Color flow
•
Trace data
•
Video Y-component data
•
Video UV-component data
•
Color M-mode data
•
RF data
Section 5-2 - General Information
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-3
Front End Processor
The Front End Processor generates the strong bursts transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the
body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these
signals and converts them to a digital signal.
Equalization
B Mode Processor
I,Q
Barrel Shift
Digital Gain
XDIF
I,Q
NCO
FIR
Synthetic
Aperture
Axial Interp
Detector
Rate
Converter
Dynamic
Range
Edge
Enhance
Focal
Zone
Splicer
Vector
Compound
Smoothing
Filter
TD
Pulser
TGC Gen
T/R Switch
I2C Master
Rigel
Probe
Port
MUX
A/D
Top Plane
PreAmp
Power
Supply
Monitors
XDIF
Control
Board
Sum
TGC
Commutator
Control
Scan Bus
Interface
RFAmp
Temperature
Sensors
HV
Pwr Sup
Control
Scan Bus
Interface
M Peak
Hold
B Mode
M Mode
Output
Grey 2D, M
PCI Bus
40P0
40P1
TxSync
BPCLK
TD
Control
Bus
Front End
Power Supply
TD Control
+3.3 V
System
Clock
Generator/
Distributor
Scan Bus
TxSync
RxSync
Generator
+5 V
Scan Bus
+5 V analog
240
VAC
PCI Bus
-5 V analog
+12 V
Scan
Sequencer
+120 V
I,Q
Capture
PS ON
Processed
Capture
(B, M)
PCI-PCI
Bridge
Ring Buffer
Video
Capture
Scan Control Board
Internal I/O
PCI Cable to BEP
Figure 5-5 The Front End
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-7
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1)
The power supply assembly receives approximately 220VAC from the secondary side of the mains
isolation transformer.
The FEPS assembly supplies DC regulated power to the Front End card rack of the LOGIQ™ 9. The
assembly is configured as a PCB which fits into the right-most slot of the Front End card rack. It
interfaces with the back plane to supply power to the Front End circuit boards.
A general enable signal (PS_ON) controls enabling and disabling all FEPS Low Voltage outputs. These
include +5VA, -5VA, +5V, 3V3, +12V, and +15V (all except PHVP ‘High Voltage’). An Enable circuit on
the FEPS detects when PS_ON becomes valid and holds all outputs off until then.
The high voltage lockout circuit monitors the +5VA, -5VA, +12VA and 3V3 supplies and locks out the
PHVP supply in the event that any one of them go below 10% of their nominal value.
PWR_OK is an active high TTL compatible output which provides a status indication of the AC input
power. It should be capable of sinking 5mA maximum. The signal switches to a TTL ‘High’ when the AC
input voltage reaches the minimum specified input level at power up. Upon loss of input voltage,
PWR_OK will go ‘Low’.
5-3-2
FEPS3.x
The FEPS3 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with
prior hardware as it provides the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) required by the TDs (5.x and TD6) and
RFAMP2.
Table 5-2
5-8
FEPS, Output Comparison
System Name
FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1
Nominal Output
FEPS3.x
Nominal Output
5VPA
+5.05V
+6.0V
5VNA
-5.05V
-6.0V
5VP
+5.05V
+5.05V
3V3
3.33V
3.33V
PHVP
+121.2V / +24.2
+121.2V / +24.24V
12VP
12.12
13.0V
15VP
+15.15
+15.15
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Front End Subsystem
The LOGIQ™ 9 Front End Subsystem consists the XDIF (Transducer Interface) board, RF Amp board
and eight TD (Transmit Delay) boards.
Figure 5-6 Basic Front End SubSystem
The Front End Subsystem provides 128 receive and 128 transmit channels as well as gain and
bandpass filtering of the received signal.
5-3-3-1
XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board
Figure 5-7 XDIF Board Functions
The XDIF supports four 128 Channel probe ports with the ability to select one of the four probe ports.
The XDIF supports a probe multiplexer requiring a 200V (+100V and -100V). The multiplexer in the
probe will select 128 of the out of up to 192 channels.
The XDIF uses a T/R (Transmit/Receive) switch on each output to the RF Amplifier board. During
transmit the T/R switch prevents the high voltage transmit pulser from damaging the receive
preamplifier. During receive the T/R switch isolates the receive preamp from the transmit high voltage
pulser.
5-3-3-2
Top Plane
Connects the receive signals from the XDIF board to the RF Amplifier board at the front of the circuit
boards.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-9
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-3-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board
(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board)
Figure 5-8 RF Amp, RF Amp2 Functions
Figure 5-9 RF Amp Board Functional Block Diagram
The RF Amplifier board shall contain 128 channels of the circuitry that is necessary to amplify the small
electronic echo signals that are received from the probe transducers. Each channel shall consist of a
low-noise, active input termination preamplifier, a time-gain compensation (TGC) amplifier, and a low
noise differential drive amplifier (buffer). The RF Amp board shall physically reside in the Beamformer
card cage adjacent to the XDIFF board.
The probe level analog input signals shall enter the RF Amp board on a series of board to board
connectors that mate the RF Amplifier Board to the XDIFF Board. These connectors carry the
transducer level receive signals that originate at the probe and make their way through the probe
interface relays, and T/R switches. The digital interface, power supplies, and reference ground shall be
provided to the RF Amp board by the system backplane.
Each amplified signal generated by the RF Amp board shall provide a differential output and drive filter
circuitry located on the TD boards via the system backplane. The TD boards perform an anti-alias
filtering operation and convert the transducer signals to a 12 bit data stream that feeds the digital
beamforming electronics.
RF Amp2 Board
The RF Amp2 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with
prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
5-10
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8)
Figure 5-10 Basic TD Board Functions
Major functions of the TD boards are:
-
Transmitter
-
Analog Receive
-
A/D (Analog to Digital conversion)
-
Digital Receiver (Rigel Beamformer Chip)
-
Control & Timing
Figure 5-11 Basic TD Input/Output Signals
The TD (Time Delay) boards send 128 transmit signals to the XDIF board. The 128 receive channels
from the RF board get low pas filtered, converted from analog to digital and then use the Rigel
beamformer chip to generate complex digital data signals representing one or two beams of ultrasound
echo information sent to the EQ board.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-11
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) (cont’d)
Figure 5-12 Basic TD Input/Output Control Signals
Major control signal from the EQ board are the Digital TGC/VREF and Serial Control Bus (I2C). Control
signal between the Scan Control board consist of Power, Timing Clocks, TD Control Bus and Fault
Interrupts
Time Delay (TD, TD4, TD5) Board Function Summary:
•
Each board assigned to a subset of 16 channels.
•
Generates and amplifies the excitation waveform for each channel.
•
Digitizes the input RF signal from the RF Amplifier board.
•
Applies dynamic apodization, dynamic receive delays, and filters to the digitized RF signal.
•
Automatically adapts receive beams for speed or resolution depending on scans.
•
Sums detected echo channel to channel, then board to board. (Boards must be contiguous.) The
last TD forwards the total output to the EQ.
•
Monitors current consumed for transmit and issues a fault signal if overcurrent is detected.
TD5 and TD5.1 (Time Delay 5)
The TD5 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior
hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
TD5.1 has same functionality as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s
TD6 and (Time Delay 6)
The TD6 Board was introduced with R6.0.0 Software and BT06. It is not backward compatible with prior
hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
TD6 has same functionality as TD5.
NOTICE DO NOT MIX TD6 boards with TD5.x boards.
d
5-12
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2)
The Scan Control Board combines onto one board the basic functionality of Image Port (IP), Front End
Control and Timing (FECT), Scan Sequencer (SS2) and the Scan Trigger (System Timing).
SCAN SEQUENCER BLOCK
EQ_BE_RxSync
PA_SCB_ACFAIL(1:0)
QRS*
VP_DAT(7:0)
IMAGE PORT 2 BLOCK
IP_CLK
LOC_CLK
DSP PCI & CTRL
PCI Slave
and
Decode
Scan Sequencer
and
Peripherals
VP_ADR(4:0)
Scan Bus
I/F
To MEQ, BMP (EBM)
SYS_SCAN_BUS(13:0)
VP_STB
SCAN I/F LE
To MEQ & BMP (EBM)
GLOB_SEC_PCI(61:0)
Cable From PC
PRIM_PCI(52:0)
(From IP2 Block)
SCAN TIGGERS(2:0)
LOC_SCAN_BUS(17:0)
PCI Interface
VIDEO_DAT(4:0)
From BMP (EBM)
BM_SCB_DAT(9:0)
From MEQ (EBM)
IQ_SCB_DAT(31:0)
Video
and
Pipelink
Input
EQ_BE_RxSync
FEC INT:
TD_HVFAULT*
HVINT*
I2CINT*
PRBINT*
CWINT*
Image
Memory
Local PCI Bus
IP_CLK
IP CTRL
IP
CONTROL
IP_CLK
LOC_SLV_PCI_BUS(60:0)
IP_CLK
SYSTEM TIMING BLOCK
LOC_CLK
System
Timing
Control
IP_CLK
Clock
Generation
System Clocks
MFG Test Clocks
SCB_EQ_RxSync
PCI 33MHz
VID_CLK
FE_SYTM_BUS(59:0)
FECB_CLK(10:0)
FECT BLOCK
LOC_SCAN_BUS(13:0)
To TD Boards
FEC_TD_BUS(80:0)
Front End Control
Board Block
IP_CLK
Figure 5-13 SCB Simplified Block Diagram
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-13
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-4-1
SCB, SCB2 High Level Features
•
5-3-4-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Generates and buffers system clocks:
-
40 MHz (40P0 and 40P1)
-
10 Mhz (BPCLK)
-
TXSync
-
RxSync
•
Configures the beamformer to fire B/M-Mode, Color, or PW Doppler vectors.
•
Controls scan sequencing in real-time; setting the vector firing order and timing intervals.
•
PCI interface to Back End Processor (BEP), BMP, and EQ or EBM/EBM2.
•
Buffers B/M data from BMP/EBM/EBM2, data from the EQ/EBM/EBM2 (for Color and PW Doppler),
and video data from the VCR to transmit to the BEP for software processing and display.
•
Interface between Host PCI and TD boards.
Compatibility
Only SCB2 Boards should be used with R3.0.0 software and greater
5-3-4-3
Scan Control Board LEDs
Table 5-3
SCB LED Indications
Function
Monitored
LED
Number
LED Color
LED Function
I960 Processor
DS1
Red
i960 Fail
DS2
Yellow
i960 Local Bus Activity
DS3
Red
Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS4
Green
Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS5
Yellow
IP Master Enable
DS6
Yellow
IP Master Ready
DS7
Red
IQ Left FIFO Error
DS8
Red
IQ Right FIFO Error
DS9
Red
BM FIFO Error
Image Port
Pipelink
DS10
Scan Sequence
5-14
FIFO’s Empty
DS11
Red
Crash
DS12
Yellow
FIFO Error
DS13
Yellow
Command Pulse
DS14
Yellow
Unused
DS15
Yellow
Pause
DS16
Green
Unused
DS17
Green
Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence
DS18
Green
Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-4-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Scan Control Board LEDs (cont’d)
Table 5-4
SCB2 2365739 LED Indications
LED
Number
LED Color
LED Function
DS1
Green
FPGA Programming Done (Passed)
DS2
Red
i960 Fail
DS5
Green
Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS6
Red
Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS7
Red
Crash
DS8
Yellow
FIFO Error
DS9
Yellow
Command Pause
DS10
Yellow
Unused
DS11
Yellow
Pause
DS12
Green
Unused
DS13
Green
Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)
DS14
Green
Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-15
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board)
5-3-5-1
General Description
The EQ dynamically gains and filters the received signal output from the final beamformer sum. TGC
control calculates range dependent analog and digital gains. The digital gain is applied to the I/Q signal.
The gained signal is then rotated in frequency to place the frequency of interest in the passband of the
subsequent FIR lowpass filter. The rotator center frequency may also be range dependent. These
controls, and the selection of the FIR coefficients may also be processing bank, vector number, or
transmit focal zone dependent.
EQ Board Block Diagram
SCAN
Control
I/F
Scan
Control
Bus
Local
Board
Control
Temperature
Monitoring
Circuits
Voltage
Monitoring
Circuits
IIC
A/D
Converters
Local
Board
Control
XDIF
and
Probe I/F
XDIF/Probe Bus
To: XDIF & Relay
Local
Board
Control
Commutat
or
Control I/F
Comm Control Bus
To: XDIF
IIC
SPROM
CLK-10MHZ
Local
Board
Control
TGC Bus
To: TDs
Analog
TGC
Base
TGC
Analog
Delay
Digital
TGC
MUX
Local
Board
Control
V-Ref
Gen
Dynamic
Apodization
Gain
Mod’s
LUT
Delay
5
Td: I-dat
21
I (L,R)
Coef
RAM
Gain
Mod’s
5
BARREL
SHIFTER
16
I (L,R)
I (L,R)
16
16
I (L,R)
5
17
Q (L,R)
Q (L,R)
Q (L,R)
Q (L,R)
Q (L,R)
17
16
16
16
MULTIPLIER
Td: Q-dat
I (L,R)
NCOM
NCO
FPGA
16
I (L,R)
FIR
16
Q (L,R)
FIR
21
16
Coef
RAM
CLK-10MHZ
Figure 5-14 EQ Board Block Diagram
5-16
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
I (L,R)
BARREL
SHIFT
AND
OUTPUT
FPGA
16
Q (L,R)
16
Data Pipe Bus
To: BMP/SCB
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-5-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Basic Functions
•
Compensates for the attenuation of the transmitted signal in tissue by depth: performs TGC based
on focal zone.
•
Compensates for frequency shift (TFC) in tissue, needed in B-Mode and M-Mode.
•
Filters out harmonics and optimizes signal to noise ratio.
•
Delivers amplified and corrected I & Q data to the BMP and the Scan Control Board.
•
Interfaces probe detection and probe ID signals between the XDIF and the host.
•
Controls transducer commutator (multiplexer) for muxed probes with more elements than channels
in the beamformer.
•
Monitors active probe temperature.
•
Masters the front end (FE) I2C busses for voltage and temperature monitoring.
•
Turns off PHVP on the card rack power supply if a TD board pulls too much power or malfunctions.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-17
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-6
5-3-6-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board
General Description
The B/M-mode Processor (BMP) subsystem takes the digital complex data from the EQ subsystem and
converts it to either B-mode (2D) or M-mode (timeline) data.
Figure 5-15 BMP Internal Functions
•
Processes I & Q data for B-Mode and M-Mode imaging.
•
Calculates echo signal’s amplitude.
•
Converts sample rate to display rate.
•
Implements dynamic range and edge enhancement.
•
Splices multiple focal zones into one image.
•
Sends processed B/M data to the Scan Control Board.
Figure 5-16 BMP Control Inputs/Outputs
5-18
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-7
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
EBM, EBM2 Board
The EBM Board was used on forward production units starting with BT’02 (November 2002). The EBM2
Board was used on forward production units starting with R3.0.0 Software (BT’03 October 2003). The
detailed functionality is found in the previous EQ and BMP sections.
5-3-7-1
Overview
The EBM/EBM2 board is the data path interface board between the last Time Delay board (TD) and the
Scan Control Board (SCB). The EBM/EBM2 receives data from the Time Delay boards, processes the
data for depth attenuation effects, and passes the data on to the B/M processor, then to the Scan
Control Board. This board is composed of two main sections the Equalization (EQ) and the B/M Mode
Processor (BMP).
The EQ section compensates for the attenuation of ultrasound in tissue. The attenuation of ultrasound
in tissue is usually modeled as being linearly dependent on frequency and depth. The EQ section
provides two major data processing functions to compensate for this phenomenon, Time Gain Control
(TGC), and Time Frequency Control (TFC). Using TGC and TFC, the EQ ”equalizes” image signals by
removing depth dependent attenuation effects from the signal, hence the name ”equalization” board. In
layman terms, the EQ gives a point deeper in the body an equal opportunity to contribute to the
ultrasound image as one closer to the body’s surface.
The BMP section process IQ Vectors from the EQ to create B and M mode vectors. This design is
composed of 12 major blocks; Synthetic Aperture, Axial Interpolator, Detector/Vector Compounder,
Smoothing Filter, Rate Converter, Dynamic Range Compression, Edge enhance, Splicer, B–Mode
Output, M–Mode Output, Vector Configuration and the PCI Interface.
5-3-7-2
Modes of Operation
The EBM/EBM2 equalization design section supports two input data buses from the final summer of the
TD board set. The two buses are referred to as the I and Q data buses (or pipes). Each two’s
complement bus is 24 bits wide and passes data from the final TD board to the EBM/EBM2 board.
Different system modes of operation cause the two data pipes to handle data in different ways. The
EBM/EBM2 board transfers output data to the Scan Control Board over two, two’s complement sixteen
bit I and Q buses. Internal EBM/EBM2 board data pipes are sixteen bit two’s complement format.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-19
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-7
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d)
Power Supply Con
HV Line
Power Supply
HV Control
I2C BUS
PCI BUS
XDIF Probe Interf
XDIF Interface Bu
SCAN CONTROL BUS
Fan Control /
Power Supply
Measurement
SCAN
Ctrl
I/F
Probe
Temperature
Sensor
Base
TGC
Analog
Delay
XDIF/
Probe
I/F
PS
Ctrl
I/F
Commutator
Ctrl
I/F
TGC / Vref Bus
MUX
V-ref
GEN
Digital
TGC
Dynamic
Apodization
Gain Mod’s
Coef
RAM
5
TFC
LUT
TD: I-Data
5
Delay
24
Q(L,R)
5
16
I(L,R)
TD: Q-Data
RXSYNC
TXSYNC
I2C
I/F
Analog
TGC
High Speed
SSRAM
~ 9Mbit
Configuration
Flash
(Host Programmed)
PCI
I/F
I(L,R)
Barrel
Shifter
NCO
Complex I(L,R)
16
Mult
I(L,R)
16
17
Multiplier
Q(L,R)
16
I(L,R)
16
32-tap
FIR
Q(L,R)
Q(L,R)
17
24
RXSYNC Delayed
32-tap
FIR
16
Barrel
Shift &
Output
Block
I(L,R)
16
Q(L,R)
Q(L,R)
16
16
Coef
RAM
CLK-20MHz
CLK-10MHz
CLK-40MHz
FIFO
8Kx18
IQ (Q) Data
FIFO
8Kx18
CLK-20MHz
RXSYNC Delay
FIFO
8Kx18
TXSYNC
Test
Vector
Generator
16
16
Dynamic
Range
Compress
SRAM
64Kx16
16
Synthetic
Aperture
Axial
Interpolation
16
8
Edge
Enhance
16
16
8
Splicer
Detector &
Vector
Compound
8
8
Local SCAN Bus
PCI
I/F
Vector
Configuration
15
B-Mode
Output
M-Mode
Output
Low
Pass
Filter
8
8
15
Rate
Converter
B/M Mode
Output
Test Vector
Capture
15
(I) Data
10 MSB
Figure 5-17 EBM/EBM2 Board Block Diagram
5-3-7-3
EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board
The EBM/EBM2 EQ section supports an eight-bit read/write data interface to the XDIF relay board. The
interface is used to transfer commutator control information to the selected probe and provides host
access to the XDIF relay board itself. The EBM/EBM2 board monitors four probes present and four
probe hook lines from the XDIF relay board. The EBM/EBM2 EQ section monitors the lines, and
generates an interrupt signal when any of the signals change state. The interrupt signal will be
debounced to limit the frequency with which probe interrupts may be generated. The EBM/EBM2 board
also measures the temperature of the selected probe over two lines from the XDIF relay board. The
SCE pulse signal connected to the EBM/EBM2 EQ section in order to be able to support the Global
Beamforming future development.
5-20
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-3-7
5-3-7-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d)
B–Mode Output Blocks
The B–mode output block collect vector data and tags for delivery to the Scan Control Board. It can form
output vectors from one or multiple input vectors (multi–transmit focus). The vector tags are used to
form the control bytes in the output vector. Only complete vectors are sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block.
The maximum vector length shall be 512 pixels.
5-3-7-5
M–Mode Output Block
M–mode acquisition is nearly always a multiple firings per output vector operation. When the vector rate
is higher than the display rate a peak accumulate function shall be used to provide an output which is
the point–by–point peak signal amplitude of all the firings since the last output. The M–mode output
block usually outputs one processed M vector after combining the receive vectors from several firings.
The maximum ratio of input vectors to output vectors is 256, although this number is transparent to the
hardware. M_GATE tag shall control when the current peak accumulation stops, the vector is sent and
a new vector is formed. The peak accumulation shall be reset after the data is sent to the BM_OUTPUT
Block.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-4
Back End Processor (BEP 1)
The Back End Processor (BEP 1) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory,
performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
SLOT 7
PC MOTHERBOARD
Front Panel
HD LED
ETHERNET
PCI Slot #5
SLOT 6
RS232 #3
RS232 #4
I2C
RS422
INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
PC2IP
PC2IP
HARD DRIVE
PCI Slot #4
SLOT 5
IDE #1
Optional 3D
system
TOP DRIVE BAY
ECG
PCI BIRD CARD
PCI Slot #3
SLOT 4
DIGITAL OUT
SPEAKER OUT
MIC IN
LINE OUT
LINE IN
MIDDLE DRIVE BAY
MOD
SOUND CARD
PCI Slot #2
SLOT 3
BOTTOM DRIVE BAY
CD RW
PCI VIDEO
PCI Slot #1
IDE #2
SLOT 2
UPS Battery
AGP VIDEO
AGP Slot
SLOT 1
JWR1
CPU #1
10/100bT
DIMM Slot #2
DIMM Slot #1
256 MB DIMM
JWOL1
DIMM Slot #3
JFP1
DIMM Slot #4
UPS
256 MB DIMM
PARALLEL
USB1
USB2
CPU #2
COM1
COM2 (EXT)
AC POWER
ATX POWER SUPPLY
PCIO MODULE
POWER
S/C VIDEO OUT
SVGA OUT 2
PCIO Board
Control
SVGA IN
SVGA OUT 1
RGB OUT
PCVIC Board
Figure 5-18 CPU/Back End Processor BEP1
NOTE:
5-22
Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements.
The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Enclosure
The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style
motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and two 733MHz processors
5-4-2
PCI Cards
Five (5) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel
2.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers
3.) Blank or PCI Bird 3D Card - Option
4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor
5.) Network Interface Card - 3Com Ethernet Card
5-4-3
AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card
•
5-4-4
Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.
•
Resolution shall be 800x600.
•
Support for 32 bit True Color
•
Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.
•
128-bit internal memory interface.
•
Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).
•
Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).
PCIO Board
This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.
-
5-4-5
Power and Internal PCI control signals
PCI Video Card
-
Input from AGP Video card
-
SVGA output to the image monitor
-
RGB output to color printer
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-23
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-4-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
UPS Battery Operation
The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the
processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition
is defined as:
-
Circuit Breaker in the OFF position
-
System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system
may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the
UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system
input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.
5-4-7
5-4-8
Internal Storage Devices:
•
A 20 or 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.
•
3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).
•
CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).
Location of the Back End Processor
P3 Backend Processor
Left Side of scanner
Rear Side
of Scanner
Front of
Scanner
Figure 5-19 Backend Processor 1 mounted in scanner
5-24
P4 Backend Processors
typically have a fan in the
center of the cover
Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-4-9
5-4-9-1
5-4-9-2
5-4-9-3
5-4-9-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Inputs (BEP 1)
AC Power
Table 5-5
AC Power
Input
Description
Connection from:
230 VAC
AC Power
AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Input
Description
Connected to:
+5Vstb
Standby voltage
DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND
Electrical Ground
DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
PWR_OK*
Power verification signal from Card Rack
Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch
Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and
from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.
ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register
Interrupt
Interrupt signal from I2C Bus
EIO > IIO > PC2IO
Microphone in to
BEP
Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console)
Top Console > IIO > BEP
Audio in to BEP
Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio
DC Voltages
Table 5-6
DC Input Voltages
Input Signals
Table 5-7
Input Signals
Top Console > IIO > PC2IO
Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP
Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP
Bi-directional Signals
Table 5-8
Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
UPS Control
RS232
Control Signals to and from the UPS
BEP > IIO
RS232 XDCTRL
Not Used
PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
I2C Bus
Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and
for reading module versions.
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
Spare RS232
Not Used
PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
VCR Remote Ctrl
(RS232)
Control signal to Internal VCR
PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1
USB bus to Top Console
PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1
Can be configured to transfer report page data
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2
Modem
PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet
Standard TCP/IP Ethernet
BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2
USB Bus for External Units
BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-25
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-4-10
Outputs
Table 5-9
5-26
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Output Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
+5VDC
DC Voltage
PC2IO > IIO
+12VDC
DC Voltage
PC2IO > IIO
PS_ON*
TBD (Active Low)
PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack
Standby
TBD
PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
SVideo
SVideo Out
PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
CVideo
Composite Color Video
PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen
PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top
Console)
BEP > Top Console
BW Video RGB
BW Video from RGB.
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out
Audio Out from BEP
TRIG
Video Trig Signal
Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)
PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
BEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-5
Back End Processor (BEP 2)
The Back End Processor (BEP 2) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory,
performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
PC
MOTHERBOARD
Front
Panel
HD Led
USB5/6
PCI Slot #6
RS232 #3
RS232 #4
I2C
RS422
PC2IPIIB
PCI Slot #5
INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
HARD DRIVE
SATA 0
PCI Slot #4
TOP DRIVE BAY
ECG
Frame Grabber
MIDDLE DRIVE
BAY
FP USB2
PCI Slot #3
MOD
SCSI Card
PCI Slot #2
PCI Slot #1
BOTTOM DRIVE
BAY
IDE #2
DVD RW
AGP card with DVI Output
FP USB 1
AGP Slot
Channel A DIMM Slot #0
USB3/4
USB1/2
CPU Fan
Channel A DIMM Slot #1
512 MB DIMM
Channel B DIMM Slot #0
512 MB DIMM
Front Panel
Header
Motherboard
SVGA
Channel B DIMM Slot #1
UPS
AC POWER
ATX POWER SUPPLY
POWER
USB3/4
COM1
CPU
PARALLEL
Chassis
Rear Fan
10/100bT
POWER
S/C VIDEO
OUT
SVGA OUT
2
DGIO Board
Control
FAN quick disconnect
DVI IN
SVGA OUT
1
CHASSIE FAN
RGB OUT
DGVIC Board
Figure 5-20 CPU/Back End Processor BEP2
NOTE:
Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements.
The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-27
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-5-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Enclosure
The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style
motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and one 2GHz processor.
5-5-2
PCI Cards
Six (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers
2.) Blank or FOB
3.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel
4.) USB Control
5.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor
6.) Blank or CW option
5-5-3
5-5-4
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC
•
Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.
•
Resolution shall be 800x600.
•
Support for 32 bit True Color
•
Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.
•
128-bit internal memory interface.
•
Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).
•
Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).
PCIO Board:
This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.
-
5-5-5
Power and Internal PCI control signals
PCVIC Card
-
Input from Motherboard AGP Video (BEP 2.0)
This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.
5-28
-
SVGA output to the image monitor
-
RGB output to color printer
Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-5-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002)
The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the DGVIC
board.
The DGVIC converts the digital video to RGBS, SVGA (to Monitor and External I/O), S-video and
Composite video outputs.
The DGIO provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and
PC On/Off.
5-5-7
Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2
Additional memory was added to the motherboard for R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. One of the 256 MByte
SIMM modules was replaced with a 512 MByte module. This brings the total RAM memory to
768MBytes and designated the unit to be a BEP2.2.
5-5-8
DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade
It is possible that older P3 Back End Processor video chains could be upgraded to digital. This involves
replacing the Analog AGP Video card with a Matrox video card that has analog and video outputs.
The PC2IO/PCVIC Tray assembly is also replaced with the DGIO/DGVIC Tray.
Digital video is supplied by the Matrox video card to the DGVIC for distribution to peripherals. Monitor
video is taken directly from the Analog output of the Matrox video card instead of the DGVIC.
5-5-9
UPS Battery Operation
The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the
processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition
is defined as:
-
Circuit Breaker in the OFF position
-
System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system
may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the
UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system
input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.
5-5-10
Internal Storage Devices
•
A 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.
•
3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).
•
CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-29
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-5-11
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Location of the Back End Processor
BEP 2
Rear Side
of Scanner
Front of
Scanner
Left Side of scanner
Figure 5-21 Backend Processor 2 mounted in scanner
5-30
Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-5-12
5-5-12-1
5-5-12-2
5-5-12-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Inputs
AC Power
Table 5-10
AC Power
Input
Description
Connection from:
230 VAC
AC Power
AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Input
Description
Connected to:
+5Vstb
Standby voltage
DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND
Electrical Ground
DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
PWR_OK*
Power verification signal from Card Rack
Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch
Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and
from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.
ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register
Interrupt
Interrupt signal from I2C Bus
EIO > IIO > PC2IO
Microphone in to
BEP
Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console)
Top Console > IIO > BEP
Audio in to BEP
Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio
Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO >
BEP
DC Voltages
Table 5-11 DC Input Voltages
Input Signals
Table 5-12 Input Signals
Top Console > IIO > PC2IO
Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-31
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-5-12-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Bi-directional Signals
Table 5-13
Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
UPS Control
RS232
Control Signals to and from the UPS
BEP > IIO
RS232 XDCTRL
Not Used
PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
I2C Bus
Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for
reading module versions.
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
Spare RS232
Not Used
PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
VCR Remote Ctrl
(RS232)
Control signal to Internal VCR
PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1
USB bus to Top Console
PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1
Can be configured to transfer report page data
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2
Modem
PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet
Standard TCP/IP Ethernet
BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2
USB Bus for External Units
BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
NOTE:
BEP2.x processors have one Com Port and six USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the
modem via the Internal I/O. A USB to Serial Converter feeds the external serial connection via
the Internal I/O. BEP 2.1 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card
going to the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. BEP 2.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the
motherboard.
5-5-12-5
USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup
(RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O)
The Prolific USB to RS232 Adapter Cable (black one) should be properly set up when the Base Image
Load is applied to the system. However, if you need to set a specific parameter for the USB COM Port
(COM1) perform the following steps:
-
After booting up with the Service Key (Dongle), entering Maintenance Mode and Windows,
select My Computer>Properties>Hardware Tab>Device manager.
-
Under Ports (COM & LPT) select “Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm/Port (COM 3)” and select
Properties.
-
Under the Port Settings TAB you can set the Bits per second, Data bits, Parity Stop Bits and
Flow Control to the desired values.
Table 5-14
5-32
Factory Default Values
Signal Name
Setting
Bits Per Second
9600
Data Bits
8
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
Flow Control
None
Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-5-13
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Outputs
Table 5-15
Output Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
+5VDC
DC Voltage
DG2IO > IIO
+12VDC
DC Voltage
DG2IO > IIO
PS_ON*
TBD (Active Low)
DG2IO > IIO > Card Rack
Standby
TBD
DG2IO > IIO > Top Console
SVideo
SVideo Out
DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
CVideo
Composite Color Video
DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen
DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen
(Top Console)
BEP > Top Console
BT06 17” LCD (with Matrox VID card)
(2 connectors: LCD and PCI DGVIC)
BW Video RGB
BW Video from RGB.
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out
Audio Out from BEP
TRIG
Video Trig Signal
VGA
DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
BEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
5-33
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-6
Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
The Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in
memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
On BEP 3.x with LCD units
only:
This card is replaced with
the Matrox Dual Output
video card
Figure 5-22 CPU/Back End Processor BEP3.x
NOTE:
5-34
Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements.
The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-6-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Enclosure
The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style
motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and a 3.2 GHz processor.
5-6-2
PCI Cards
Six (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) USB 2.0 Hub Card
2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card
3.) PCI Video Card
4.) PCI DGVIC Card
5.) PC2IP Card
6.) Blank or CW Card
5-6-3
5-6-4
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card
•
Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.
•
Resolution shall be 800x600.
•
Support for 32 bit True Color
•
Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.
•
128-bit internal memory interface.
•
Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).
•
Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).
•
AGP Video Card (CRT only)
•
Matrox Dual Output Video Card replaces standard AGP Video card (LCD only).
PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards
The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the PCI
DGVIC board.
The PCI DGVIC converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video
outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power
and PC On/Off.
5-6-5
UPS Battery Operation
The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the
processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition
is defined as:
-
Circuit Breaker in the OFF position
-
System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system
may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the
UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system
input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent
standby use is six (6) months.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-35
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-6-6
5-6-7
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Internal Storage Devices:
•
A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.
•
DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).
Location of the Back End Processor
BEP 3 / 3.5
Front of
Scanner
Rear of
Scanner
Left Side of
Scanner
Figure 5-23 Backend Processor mounted in scanner
5-36
Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-6-8
5-6-8-1
5-6-8-2
5-6-8-3
5-6-8-4
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Inputs (BEP 3.x)
AC Power
Table 5-16
AC Power
Input
Description
Connection from:
230 VAC
AC Power
AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Input
Description
Connected to:
+5Vstb
Standby voltage
DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND
Electrical Ground
DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
PWR_OK*
Power verification signal from Card Rack
Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch
Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and
from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.
ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register
Interrupt
Interrupt signal from I2C Bus
EIO > IIO > PC2IO
DC Voltages
Table 5-17 DC Input Voltages
Input Signals
Table 5-18 Input Signals
Top Console > IIO > PC2IO
Bi-directional Signals
Table 5-19 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
UPS Control
RS232
Control Signals to and from the UPS
BEP > IIO
I2C Bus
Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for
reading module versions.
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VCR Remote Ctrl
(RS232)
Control signal to Internal VCR
PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1
USB bus to Top Console
PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1
Can be configured to transfer report page data
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2
Modem
PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet
Standard TCP/IP Ethernet
BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2
USB Bus for External Units
BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
BEP3 processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the
Internal I/O. BEP 3 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to
the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI DGVIC Tray. BEP 3 processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on
the motherboard.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-37
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-6-9
Outputs
Table 5-20
5-38
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Output Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
+5VDC
DC Voltage
Bulkhead > IIO
+12VDC
DC Voltage
Bulkhead > IIO
PS_ON*
TBD (Active Low)
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card
Rack
Standby
TBD
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top
Console
SVideo
SVideo Out
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
CVideo
Composite Color Video
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top
Console)
BEP > Top Console
BW Video RGB
BW Video from RGB.
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out
Audio Out from BEP
TRIG
Video Trig Signal
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
BEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-7
Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
The Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in
memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
Figure 5-24 CPU/Back End Processor BEP4.x
NOTE:
Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements.
The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-39
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-7-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Enclosure
The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style
motherboard with minimum of 1 GB of RAM and a 3.4 GHz processor.
5-7-2
PCI Cards
Six (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) PCI Video Card
2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card
3.) USB Cable
4.) PCI DGVIC2 Card
5.) PC2IP3 Card
6.) Blank or CW Card
5-7-3
5-7-4
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card
•
Digital output shall comply with the DVI specification.
•
Resolution shall reflect the installed monitor specifications.
•
Support for 32 bit True Color
•
Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.
•
128-bit internal memory interface.
•
Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).
•
Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).
•
PCI Express Video Card
PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards
The ADD2 Card is a PCIe card that mimics the SVGA video and provides a digital video output to the
PCI DGVIC2 board.
The PCI DGVIC2 converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video
outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power
and PC On/Off.
5-7-5
UPS Battery Operation
The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the
processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition
is defined as:
-
Circuit Breaker in the OFF position
-
System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system
needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery
age, system input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent
standby use is six (6) months.
5-40
Section 5-7 - Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-7-6
5-7-7
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Internal Storage Devices:
•
A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.
•
DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).
Location of the Back End Processor
BEP 4.x
Front of
Scanner
Rear of
Scanner
Left Side of
Scanner
Figure 5-25 Backend Processor mounted in scanner
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-41
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-7-8
5-7-8-1
5-7-8-2
5-7-8-3
5-7-8-4
NOTE:
5-42
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Inputs (BEP 4.x)
AC Power
Table 5-21
AC Power
Input
Description
Connection from:
230 VAC
AC Power
AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Input
Description
Connected to:
+5Vstb
Standby voltage
DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND
Electrical Ground
DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
PWR_OK*
Power verification signal from Card Rack
Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch
Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel.
(Reset button on the rear of the External I/O not active)
Top Console > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register
Interrupt
Interrupt signal from I2C Bus
EIO > IIO > PC2IO
DC Voltages
Table 5-22 DC Input Voltages
Input Signals
Table 5-23 Input Signals
Bi-directional Signals
Table 5-24 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
UPS Control
RS232
Control Signals to and from the UPS
BEP > IIO
I2C Bus
Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for
reading module versions.
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VCR Remote Ctrl
(RS232)
Control signal to Internal VCR
PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1
USB bus to Top Console
PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1
Can be configured to transfer report page data
PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2
Modem
PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet
Standard TCP/IP Ethernet
BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2
USB Bus for External Units
BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
BEP4.x processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the
Internal I/O. BEP4.x Processors have digital video coming from an ADD2 card going to the
DGIO/DGVIC or PCI-DGVIC2 Tray. BEP4.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the
motherboard.
Section 5-7 - Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-7-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Outputs
Table 5-25
Output Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
+5VDC
DC Voltage
Bulkhead > IIO
+12VDC
DC Voltage
Bulkhead > IIO
PS_ON*
TBD (Active Low)
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card
Rack
Standby
TBD
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top
Console
SVideo
SVideo Out
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
CVideo
Composite Color Video
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top
Console)
BEP > Top Console
BW Video RGB
BW Video from RGB.
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out
Audio Out from BEP
TRIG
Video Trig Signal
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
BEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-43
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-8
BEP Power On Path
(refer to Figure 5-26 on page 5-44 )
The Back End Processor is powered ON by:
-
Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.
-
The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the
Internal I/O.
-
The PC Power ON signal from the II/O (B6) goes to the PC2IO (D2) then to the BEP
motherboard commanding the BEP Power Supply to turn ON.
Figure 5-26 BEP Power On Path
5-44
Section 5-8 - BEP Power On Path
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-9
BEP Power Off Path
(refer to Figure 5-27 on page 5-45 )
The Back End Processor is powered Off by:
-
Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.
-
The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the
Internal I/O to the I2C register.
-
Software detects the request to power down via the I2C buss from the II/O (B5) to the BEP
(D1).
-
The system begins a controlled shut down procedure closing applications, files, turning off FE
rack power and finally BEP power.
Figure 5-27 BEP Power Off Path
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-45
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-10
Operator Console Control PWA
Figure 5-29 and Figure 5-28 show the audio path through the Operator Console Control Printed Wire
Assembly.
Figure 5-28 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Power
Figure 5-29 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Audio
5-46
Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-10-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Console Main Cable
5-10-1-1
Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04
K
I
L
H
J
G
F
E
A
M
D
C
B
Figure 5-30 Main Cable Drawing - prior to BT04
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-47
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-10-1-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)
Table 5-26
Main Cable Composition Prior to BT04
Item
Function
Lower to
Description
A
Safety Ground Connector
A-G
Safety Ground Connector
B
DVI to DVI Interface
B-I
Interface to the Touch Screen B- I
C
RGB to the Main Monitor
C-H
RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
D
110 VAC to the Main Monitor
D-J
110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
E
USB Audio, Microphone
E-K
USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
F
DC Power and Control
F-K
DC Power and Control to the Operator panel
G
Safety Ground Connector
A-G
Safety Ground Connector
H
RGB to the Main Monitor
C- H
RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
I
DVI to DVI Interface
B-I
Interface to the Touch Screen B - I
J
110 VAC to the Main Monitor
D-J
110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
K
USB Audio, Microphone and DC
E/F - K
USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
L
Microphone to the Operator panel
E-L
to the Operator panel Microphone
M
“Z” Release Cable
5-10-1-2
Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04
Table 5-27
From piston to “Z” release handle on the console
Connector A & G- Safety Ground
Pin
Signal
1
Ground
Table 5-28
Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
LVDS Data 2-
10
LVDS Data 1+
19
Ground
2
LVDS Data 2+
11
Ground
20
3
Ground
12
21
4
13
22
Ground
5
14
+5V
23
LVDS Clock -
24
LVDS Clock +
6
+5V
15
Return
7
Return
16
+12V Backlight
17
LVDS Data 2-
18
LVDS Data 2-
8
9
5-48
LVDS Data 1-
Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-10-1-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)
Table 5-29
Connector C & H - Touch Screen Interface
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Red
6
Red Ground
11
nc
2
Green
7
Green Ground
12
nc
3
Blue
8
Blue Ground
13
H Sync
4
nc
9
nc
14
V Sync
5
nc
10
Sync Ground
15
nc
Table 5-30
Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
110 VAC
2
Ground
3
Neutral
Table 5-31
Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
nc
6
USB 5V
11
Ground Audio - Right
2
nc
7
USB 5V
12
Ground Microphone
3
Audio - Left
8
USB D+
13
Ground USB
4
Audio - Right
9
nc
14
Ground USB
5
Microphone
10
Ground Audio - Left
15
USB D-
Table 5-32
Connector F - Op Console Power
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
+15
6
+12V
11
Standby LED 0
2
+15
7
+12V
12
nc
3
nc
8
+12v
13
+12 Ground
4
On/Off SW0
9
+15 Ground
14
Ground USB
5
On/Off SW1
10
+15 Ground
15
USB D-
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-49
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-10-1-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)
Table 5-33
Connector K- Op Console Power, Audio, Mic, Control
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Standby LED 0
13
+15V
25
nc
2
nc
14
+ 15V Ground
26
nc
3
On/Off SW1
15
nc
27
USB 5V
4
On/Off SW0
16
nc
28
USB Ground
5
+12V
17
MIcrophone
29
USB 5V
6
+12V Ground
18
Microphone Ground
30
USB Ground
7
+12V
19
Shield Power/Control
31
USB D+
8
+12V Ground
20
Shield Audio/Mic
32
USB D-
9
+12V
21
Audio - Left
33
Shield USB
10
+12V Ground
22
Audio - Left Ground
34
nc
11
+15V
23
Audio - Right
12
+ 15V Ground
24
Audio - Right Ground
Table 5-34
Connector L- Console Microphone
Pin
Signal
1
Microphone
Microphone Ground
5-50
Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-10-1-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after
K
I
H
F
J
G
E
A
M
D
C
B
Figure 5-31 Main Cable - BT04 and after
Table 5-35
Main Cable Composition - BT04 and after
Item
Function
Lower to
Description
A
Safety Ground Connector
A&G
Safety Ground Connector
B
DVI to DVI Interface
B&I
Interface to the Touch Screen B- I
C
Housing Terminals
C&H
Video for Main CRT
D
110 VAC to the Main Monitor
D&J
110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
E
USB Audio, Microphone
E-K
USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
F
DC Power and Control
F-K
DC Power and Control to the Operator panel
G
Safety Ground Connector
A&G
Safety Ground Connector
H
RGB to the Main Monitor
C&H
RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
I
DVI to DVI Interface
B&I
Interface to the Touch Screen B - I
J
110 VAC to the Main Monitor
D&J
110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
K
USB Audio, Microphone and DC
E/F - K
USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
M
“Z” Release Cable
From piston to “Z” release handle on the console
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-51
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-10-1-4
Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218)
Table 5-36
Connector A & G- Safety Ground - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin
Signal
1
Ground
Table 5-37
Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
LVDS Data 2-
10
LVDS Data 1+
19
Ground
2
LVDS Data 2+
11
Ground
20
3
Ground
12
21
4
13
22
Ground
5
14
+5V
23
LVDS Clock -
24
LVDS Clock +
6
+5V
15
Return
7
Return
16
+12V Backlight
17
LVDS Data 0-
18
LVDS Data 0+
8
9
Table 5-38
5-52
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
LVDS Data 1-
Connector C & H - Video for Main CRT - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
TMDS Data 2-
10
TMDS Data 1+
19
Ground
2
TMDS Data 2+
11
Ground
20
nc
3
Ground
12
nc
21
nc
4
nc
13
nc
22
Ground
5
nc
14
+5V
23
TMDS Clock -
6
DDC Clock (SCL)
15
+5 Return
24
TMDS Clock +
7
DDC Data (SCA)
16
Hot Plug Detect
C1
Analog Red
8
Analog Vert Sync
17
TMDS Data 0-
C2
Analog Green
9
TMDS Data 1-
18
TMDS Data 0+
C3
Analog Blue
C4
Analog Horz Sync
C5
Ground
Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-10-1-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) (cont’d)
Table 5-39
Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
110 VAC
2
Ground
3
Neutral
Table 5-40
Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
nc
6
USB 5V
11
Ground Audio - Right
2
nc
7
USB 5V
12
Ground Microphone
3
Audio - Left
8
USB D+
13
Ground USB
4
Audio - Right
9
nc
14
Ground USB
5
Microphone
10
Ground Audio - Left
15
USB D-
Table 5-41
Connector F - Op Console Power - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
+15
6
+12V
11
Standby LED 0
2
+15
7
+12V
12
nc
3
nc
8
+12v
13
+12 Ground
4
On/Off SW0
9
+15 Ground
14
+12 Ground
5
On/Off SW1
10
+15 Ground
15
+12 Ground
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-53
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-11
Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)
The Patient I/O is mounted inside the Backend Processor’s cabinet with its connector panel available
on the front of the scanner.
The Patient IO contains the electronics for ECG, phono and two analog inputs. One of the inputs has
programmable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The electronics also contains a
pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements.
ISOLATION
PHONO
PHONO
ECG
ECG / RESPIRATION
AUX 1
A/D
AUX1
AUX2
(Pulse/Pressure)
AUX 2
(Pulse/Pressure)
Figure 5-32 Patient I/O - Block Diagram
Inputs
-
Phono (from a phono heart microphone)
-
ECG / Respiration
-
AUX1
-
AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)
These signals are optically isolated from the rest of the system.
Outputs
Serial Trace Data via Internal I/O to the SPD Board.
5-54
Section 5-11 - Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)
Digital Trace Data
to PC2IO
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-12
Internal I/O
The Internal I/O is the interface between the Card Cage, PC Module, and the rest of the system,
including the Top Console and the Peripherals. Table 9-26 on page 9-45 and Table 9-30 on page 9-58
have information on cable call-outs.
BACK-END PROCESSING MODULE
SVGA BD.
SVGA
SVGA
MONITOR
SVGA
TOP CONSOLE
FRONT-END
PROCESSING
MODULE
Ctrl. signals
audio & TV video
Power
USB, audio, ctrl. signals
Power
3D &
ROTATION
ADAPTER
Ctrl. signals
AC POWER
& FANS
Ctrl. signals
RS232, I2C
& ctrl. signals
PERIPHERALS
(VCR & printers)
Power
PC2IP
TV video,
SGVA
& I2C
Power
TV - RGBS
TV video, audio,
RS232, ctrl. signals
PCVIC
TV video, SVGA, RS232 &
I2C
INTERNAL I/O
Power
PC2IO
PAT I/O
Power
Serial data, I2C
Ethernet, USB,
COM1/2 & audio
RS232
RS232, USB, I2C, Ethernet,
SVGA, TV video
& ctrl signals
Power
UPS
EXTERNAL I/O
Power
Figure 5-33 Internal I/O Basic Interconnect
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-55
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 5-12
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Internal I/O (cont’d)
TO CARD RACK
SONY VCR SVO-9500MD
Remote
Right
Left
AUDIO OUT
Right
AUDIO IN
Left
A8
SONY B/W PRINTER
UP890MD
B/W Video In
A9
RS-232C
A6
A7
RS-232C
VIDEO OUT
A2
A15
A11
SONY
COLOR PRINTER
UP-2900MD
Video Output
VIDEO IN
COLOR PRNT
VIDEO
A10
RGB & Sync
Speaker
A1
OP PANEL
Audio Amp
Mic Pre-Amp
Video/Mic
A3
A14
AC Power
Op Control
MONITOR
A4
To AC CONTROL ASSY
for FAN SPEED
Regulation
USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT
Video Rcvr
COLOR PRNT
VIDEO
TOUCH PANEL
VIDEO
A5
USER INTERFACE
D5 RGB Out PC/VIC
50M
B5
D4 SVGA Out
D3 SVGA from AGP
PC2IO
SVGA VIDEO
50M
B6
D1 I/O-PC2IO
Signals Cable
D2 Power from PC
B7
B8
COM2 (EXT)
TO
INTERNAL I/O
BOARD
USB #2
USB #1
B1
B3
10/100 T
B9
UPS CNTRL
B4
Line In
Line Out
Mic In
PC
MOTHERBOARD
COM1
B2
SOUND CARD
INTERNAL I/O BOARD
SVGA VIDEO
TOUCH PANEL
VIDEO
PCI Bus to FEP
Cardrack
On LCD units
only:
Matrox Dual
Output video
card
AGP VIDEO
PCI VIDEO
CD/RW
FLOCK OF BIRDS
(option)
MOD
PC2IP
Ethernet
ECG
PC MODULE
Figure 5-34 Internal I/O Module Overview
Internal I/O Enhancement for BT’03 (FC200423)
Modifications were made to the Internal I/O in October of 2003 to enhance the performance of the
Microphone function. Resistor values were changed in the microphone amplifier circuit to increase the
gain, a capacitor was added to reduce noise as well as a modified wiring scheme and differential
pre-amp to reduce noise. This new FRU is backwards compatible.
5-56
Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 5-12
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Internal I/O (cont’d)
Figure 5-35 Internal I/O Back End Processor Connections
The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources
to multiple destinations.
•
SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of
RGB can be fed to a color printer.
•
Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and
printers.
•
The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and
through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers.
•
Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and
Modem.
•
Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO.
•
Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board.
•
The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board.
•
An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-57
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-12-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Location in the Unit
The Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system).
5-12-2
LEDs
Nine green LEDs indicate that the respective DC Voltages are OK.
NOTE:
The -15 V LED is not used on the LOGIQ™ 9. It is normal for it to be off (not lit).
Figure 5-36 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status.
5-12-3
Fuses
All output voltages are fused
5-12-4
Jumpers and Dip-switches
There are no Jumpers or Dip Switches on the Internal I/O.
5-58
Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-12-5
5-12-5-1
5-12-5-2
5-12-5-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Inputs
DC Voltages
Table 5-42 DC Input Voltages
Input
Description
Connection from
+3.3 VDC
Input DC Voltage
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+5 VDC
Input DC Voltage
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+10 VDC
Input DC Voltage
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+15 VDC
Input DC Voltage
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
-15 VDC
-Not used on the L9 Input DC Voltage
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+6 VDC (analog)
Input DC Voltage
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
–5 VDC (analog)
Input DC Voltage
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+5 VDC
Input DC Voltage
Backend Processor > J17
+12 VDC
Input DC Voltage
Backend Processor > J17)
Video Input Signals
Table 5-43 Video Input Signals
Input
Description
Connection from
SVGA
Video Signal to External I/O
PC2IO (Connector J16)
SVHS
Video Signal to VCR & External I/O
PC2IO(Connector J16)
SVHS
Video Signal to MBD (IMP)
VCR (Connector J11)
Luma
Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O
PC2IO (Connector J16)
Comp. Video
Video Signal to External I/O
PC2IO (Connector J16)
Comp. Video
Video Signal to MBD (IMP)
Color printer
Audio Input Signals
Table 5-44 Audio Input Signals
Input
Description
Two channel audio
MBD (IMP)
Two channel audio
Two channel audio
Connection from
VCR
Audio signals, summed and distributed
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
BEP
5-59
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-12-5 Inputs (cont’d)
5-12-5-4
5-12-5-5
5-60
Serial Ports
Table 5-45 Serial Ports
Input
Description
Connection from
USB
Standard USB Serial Bus
BEPM - Top console
USB
Standard USB Serial Bus
BEPM - IEIO
Ethernet
Standard Ethernet
BEPM - IEIO
RS232
Standard RS232 Serial Bus
BEPM COM1 - IEIO
RS232
Standard RS232 Serial Bus
BEPM COM2 - IEIO
RS232
Standard RS232 Serial Bus
PC2IO - Spare (J16)
RS232
Standard RS232 Serial Bus
PC2IO - VCR (J16)
RS232
PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16)
RS232
PC2IO – UPS (Connector J16)
Control Signals
Table 5-46 Control Signals
Input
Description
Connection from
Control signals
Spare
MBD/FEC (Connector J16)
Control signals
Spare
MBD/FEC (Connector J16)
Trace trigger
To EIO
PC2IO (Connector J16)
Fan control signals
To AC Power
MBD (Connector J16)
Power control
signals
To MBD and AC Power
PC2IO (Connector J16)
Power on/off
To Relay
Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO
Test (Connector J16)
Standby
To Top Console
PC2IO (Connector J16)
Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-12-6
5-12-6-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Outputs
DC Voltage
Table 5-47 DC Output Voltages
Output
Description
+5 VDC
Connection to
From BEP
+12 VDC
+5 VDC,
-15 VDC,
Spare (Connector J21)
From Card Rack
-5 VDC analog
+5 VDC
From BEP
+12 VDC
+5 VDC,
-15 VDC,
From Card Rack
Not Used
From Card Rack
Not Used
-5 VDC analog
+5 VDC,
+15 VDC,
+12 VDC
From BEP
+15 VDC
From Card Rack
Top Console
+5 VDC
From BEP
+12 VDC
+5 VDC,
EIO
+15 VDC,
From Card Rack
-5 VDC analog
+6 VDC analog
5-12-6-2
AUDIO
Table 5-48
Audio Outputs
Output
Description
Connection to
Top Console speakers and BEP
Audio (two
channels)
5-12-6-3
Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP
VCR and IEIO
Connectors – Solder Side
Table 5-49 Connectors, Solder side
Input
Description
A12/J21
Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female
A13/J20
Spare – power, 15pins D-sub, female
A14/J24
AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female
A15/P23
Rotation adapter – signals, 15pins
D-sub, male
A16/P22
Spare – signals, 25pins D-sub, female
P30
EIO – signals and power, 110pins male
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
Connection from
5-61
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-12-6 Outputs (cont’d)
5-12-6-4
5-62
Interface Connectors – Component Side
Table 5-50 Connectors, Component Side
Input
Description
A1/J1
B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female.
A2/P4
VCR remote ctrl – RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.
A3/P5
Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.
A4/J2
Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female.
A5/P4
Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male.
A6/J6
Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack.
A7/J7
Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack.
A8/J8
Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack.
A9/J9
Audio in from VCR, right
A10/J10
SVHS out to VCR
A11/J11
SVHS in from VCR
B1/J12
USB to Top console
B2/J13
USB to external I/O
B3/J14
Ethernet
B4/J15
Audio I/O
B5/J16
PC2IO signals
B6/J17
PC2IO power
B7/P18
COM1
B8/P19
COM2
B9/P25
UPS remote control
J32
MBD – signals and power
Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
Connection from
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-13
Top Console
The Top Console includes a Stand By/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the
picture quality, and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A).
Figure 5-37 Top Console
BT’03 Consoles added a USB connector to the Upper Op Panel for the Wired Voice Scan Option. This
connection should only be used for Wired Voice Scan.
Figure 5-38 BT’03 Top Console
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-63
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-14
Monitor
17-inch High Resolution Monitor with no interlace scan includes loudspeakers for stereo sound output
(used during Doppler scanning).
Figure 5-39 Monitors: CRT (top), 17” LCD option (left), 19” LCD (right)
5-64
Section 5-14 - Monitor
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-15
External I/O
The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external items.
Right Side
of Scanner
External I/O
Figure 5-40 External I/O
5-15-1
Location in the Unit
On the rear of the scanner, above the power inlet and power breaker.
5-15-2
Input Signals
Table 5-51
Input
Footswitch
Connector
Input Signals
Description
Connection from/via/to
Footswitch is a mechanical switch that connect a signal to
Footswitch > External I/O > Internal I/O
ground.
> PC2IO (BEP)
Internal level is TTL (0-3.3V)
DC Voltages from BEP
+5 VDC
Used for Optical Couplers on RS232 signals
+12 VDC
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
I/O
DC Voltages from Card Rack
+5 VDC
+15 VDC
-5 VDC analog
Used for Optical Couplers on Footswitch
Card Rack > Internal I/O > External I/O
+6 VDC analog
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-65
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-15-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Bi-directional Signals
Table 5-52
Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
Ethernet
Standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet
Ethernet - External I/O - Internal I/O BEP (Ethernet Connector)
COM1
Serial RS-232 port (Can be configured to transfer report
page data to an external processor)
External Device - External I/O - Internal
I/O - BEP (COM1)
USB
Standard USB (Universal Serial Bus), (0-5V)
USB Device - External I/O - Internal I/O
- BEP (USB #2))
Modem
Internal Modem Telephone Line Connection
Analog Phone Line - External I/O
(Connector Panel) - External I/O (Rear
Side)- Modem
COM2
Serial RS-232 port
(on rear side of External I/O)
Modem - External I/O
(Rear Side) - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)
Burn-in Power
On/Off Control
Burn-in Power On/Off Control (on rear side of External I/O)
- Used for factory testing.
External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O
Connection to
Internal I/O Board
SVGA OUT
EXTERNAL I/O
PWB
USB
S-Video OUT
C-Video OUT
BW Video OUT
10/100Base-TX
Burn In
Power
ON/OFF
Control
Audio (R)
Audio (L)
To MODEM
External I/O
Upper PWB
RS232 (COM1:)
TRIGGER
FOOTSWITCH
EXPOSE #1
EXPOSE #2
Modem Phone
Connection
MODEM
EXTERNAL I/O
Module
Figure 5-41 External I/O
5-66
Section 5-15 - External I/O
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-15-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Output Signals
Table 5-53
Output Signals
Signal Name
Description
Signal Path
Stereo Audio
Stereo audio to external VCR. (Same signal as delivered to
internal VCR).
Audio Source (Internal
VCR/Microphone/BEP) > Internal
I/O > External I/O > External VCR.
Composite Video
Super Video
(SVHS)
External composite video, 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
sync negative.
I/O > External Composite Video Device
Super Video
Luminance: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.
Color: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.
External black and white video
Black and White
video
1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative.
Trig
Trigger Signal, 0-3.3V
SVGA
SVGA (RGBS) high resolution video output
(Same signal as sent to the systems monitor)
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
I/O > External VCR
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
I/O > External B/W Video Device
PCIDG/DG VIC > PC2IO (BEP) >
Internal I/O > External I/O > External
Monitor
Remote Expose #1
A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
I/O > External Peripheral
Remote Expose #2
A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
I/O > External Peripheral
Several signal are fed from the Internal I/O board to an External I/O board located on the rear of the
system. This board contains data buffers and a galvanic isolation section.
Different types of signals are fed to connectors accessible on the External I/O.
•
R, G, B and Sync are provided for external RGB monitors or printers.
•
Composite video, black and white video and S-VHS video are buffered and fed to output connectors
for external monitors and printers.
•
Two serial RS-232 ports are provided for external communication with e.g. the System CPU.
•
An Ethernet signal from the BEP is fed to an Ethernet connector. It is used for connectivity, including
DICOM Network.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-67
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-16
Peripherals
A DVR or VCR, an analog or digital Black-and-White Video Printer, and an analog or digital Color Printer
may be installed on the scanner. These devices receive video signals from the Internal I/O Board and
power from the AC Control Box.
Peripherals are generally specified and approved regionally.
BT’02 (BEP 2.1 and above) systems have digital peripheral capabilities through USB or USB To SCSI
converters.
5-68
Section 5-16 - Peripherals
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-17
Modem and USB Modem
5-17-1
General Description
Multi-Tech global modem. The modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line for
InSite capabilities.
A USB Modem was introduced at BT04. The USB modem does not require external power, and has no
serial connection as it plugs directly into the back of the BEP.
BT07 and later do not support the modem.
5-17-2
Location in the Unit
Global Modem
Figure 5-42 Modem: Location in Unit
5-17-3
5-17-4
Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem)
•
DC Voltage from Modem Power (AC/DC Converter)
•
RS232 from Backend Processor via Internal I/O and External I/O
•
Analog Phone line via External I/O
Fuses
None
5-17-5
Jumpers and Dip-switches
None
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-69
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-17-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
LEDs (non-USB Modem)
The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.
TDRD CD 56
3314OHTRECFX
Figure 5-43 LEDs on Modem’s Front Panel
Table 5-54
LEDs on Modem
LED Color
Description
Normally State
- Red
TD (Transmit Data)
Flashes during use.
- Red
RD (Receive Data)
Flashes during use.
- Red
CD (Carrier Detect)
ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during
communication.
OFF indicates no or broken connection.
56 (56K Mode)
During Power On: Briefly Flashing
- Red
33 (V.34 Mode)
These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If
one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON
until the modem is reset or connected the next time.
- Red
14 (V.32bis Mode)
At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF.
- Red
OH (Off hook)
- Red
ON when dialing, online, or answering a call
Flashes if puls dialing
Off when modem not in use
ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the
modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call.
- Red
TR (Terminal Ready)
- Red
EC (Error Correction (V.42))
OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port
has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will
disconnect.
ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON
Blinking: Compression turned ON
OFF: Normal operation.
- Red
5-70
FX (Fax)
Section 5-17 - Modem and USB Modem
Always OFF
Located under BEP
XFMR BOX
Main AC Power In
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5V
INVERTER
5V
12V
OP Panel
12V comes from BEP
15V comes from FEPS
12V
3.3V
INVERTER
3.3V
15V Audio
USB
120VAC_ A
120VAC_ B
20VAC
P101
Main Cable
FB200795
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
J10
P30
A13
A12
A5
A4
B1
BEP_12V
BEP_5V
RACK_15V
RACK_5V
RACK_-5V
RACK_3V3
BEP_5V
RACK_15V
BEP_5V
BEP_12V
RACK_15V
B6
J32
RPWISON
J31
INTERNAL I/O
A14 PS_ON_L(RPWONN)
To FE card rack
FB200802-2
To BEP
FB200802-3
To optional modem
FB200802-1
To peripherals
FB200802-4
To main monitor
Voltage feedback fan
speed control coming
from EBM
EXTERNAL I/O
P100
220V
220V
220V
P11
P10
P9
120/230V
P7
120V
P8
Peripheral voltage
selector
100-120V
220-240V
FB200320
Fan Assembly
FB200580
FANOUT_L
PS_ON_L(RPWONN)
AC Detect
RC delay
AC CONTROL BOX
12V
5V
3.3V
-12V
5V_stndby
To Probe
Bias
(via XDIF)
A1
X
D
I
F
A2
R
F
A3
T
D
0
A4
T
D
1
FRONT END CARD RACK
24V Battery Pack
for BEP UPS
Minus lead has a
20A fuse
BEP
Power
Supply
BEP
AC
Adapter
070C5080
070C5080
070C5080
A5
T
D
2
A6
T
D
3
PC2IP
A7
T
D
4
Motherboard
A8
T
D
5
PCI Video
I960
USB1
5V
DGVIC
&DGIO
12V
5V
RPWONN
RPWISON
Modem
A9
T
D
6
C22
D2
To B/W Printer
To VCR
Note :
BT'04 and later systems, the
modem is USB attached and
does not require AC power.
Note :
Replaced by 3 lead cable
(FC200571) and Y cable
(5112631) for BT'04 and
later systems.
A11
+/- 100V
E
B
M
A12
A13
S
C
B
+/- 100V
from EBM
for test
point only
on FEPS
Power_OK
Front
End
Power
Supply
(FEPS)
For BEP Power on/off
signal path see
Sec 5-4-14 (on)
Sec 5-4-15 (off)
Arrows indicate
which boards use
this voltage.
All voltages and
Power_OK signal
are generated in
the FEPS except
as noted.
15VP
PHVP (120V)
12VP (Digital)
5VP, 3.3VP (Digital)
5VPA, 5VNA (Analog)
Line Filter
RPWONN = Rack Power on
RPWISON = Rack Power is on
070D2802
FB200798
EBM generates
+/- 100V from 12VP
On older systems the
EQ provides:
-100V (from 12VP)
+100V (from 120V)
A10
T
D
7
12v
To Color Printer
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LCD
Display
P6
P5
120VAC
Main Monitor
USB
HUB
FB200803
FB200804
For 100-120V, connect to
P5 pin1-4.
For 220-240V,
connect to P5 pin 3-6.
2286301
Main CB
Inrush current limiter
Reserved for Wireless Mic
L9 POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM (AC & DC)
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-18
Power Distribution
Figure 5-44 Overall Power Distribution
5-71
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-18-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Power Distribution Overview
The AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to
galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an
inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC
or 230 VAC. The AC Power also controls and supplies the 20VAC needed by the systems cooling fan.
5-18-2
AC Power PWB
AC DISTRIBUTION PWB
TO OUTLET
AC INLET BOX
INRUSH
LIMIT
230Vac
115Vac
TRANSFORMER BOX
Cable #27
Mains
switch
L
230Vac
20Vac
230 115
TO PERIPHERIALS (115 or 230 Vac)
TO MONITOR (115 Vac)
Cable #13
TO MODEM (230 Vac)
Fan
regulator
TO PC (230 Vac)
TO CARD RACK (230 Vac)
CABLES INTERNAL IN AC CONTROL MODULE #27
TO A14 ON INTERNAL I/O
Cable #7
M
POWER SUPPLY ON,
FAN SPEED CONTROL
Figure 5-45 AC Power Distribution
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
mains outlet on site.
The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system.
The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will
automatically break the power.
From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter (titled: Inrush Limiter in
Figure 5-45) to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.
The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains.
5-72
Section 5-18 - Power Distribution
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-18-2 AC Power PWB (cont’d)
Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230VAC or 115 VAC (two different part numbers/FRUs).
The configuration of the plug on the cable to the AC Transformer is different for the two AC Voltages.
From the AC Transformer, there are three outlets;
•
20 VAC
•
115 VAC
•
230 VAC
The 20 VAC is routed via the fan regulator to the system fan. (See separate description, Chapter 5 - Air
Flow Control).
The 115 VAC is routed via a fuse to an AC Voltage selector, used for selecting the right output voltage
for the Peripherals outlet and the Monitor. (The alternative voltage to this outlet is 230 VAC.)
The 230 VAC output from the Transformer is routed via a fuse and distributed to the AC Voltage selector
for the Peripherals outlet and to the following AC outlets:
•
Modem
•
Back End Processor
•
Card Rack
Figure 5-46 Connectors on Back of AC Controller
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-73
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-18-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Controller Differences
Figure 5-47 Original AC Controller Functions
5-74
Section 5-18 - Power Distribution
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Controller FC200403/FC200404
5-18-3 AC Controller Differences (cont’d)
Figure 5-48 AC Controller FC 200403/FC200404
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-75
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-19
Mechanical Descriptions
5-19-1
5-19-1-1
5-19-2
Monitor
Standard
•
Tilt: 10° forwards and backwards.
•
Swivel: 90° rotation.
Top Console Positioning
Figure 5-49 Top Console Positioning
5-76
•
Vertical Access: The control panel offers 27 inches (200 mm) of vertical adjustment.
•
Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 45° of horizontal adjustment when the Z-arm is
released.
Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-19-2-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
17” LCD (Option)
•
Tilt Adjustable Monitor: Tilt Angle: Up 10°, Down 90°
•
Range of Movement: Up 89mm, Down 211mm
Left and Right from center: max 855mm
•
Monitor Arm Neck: plus or minus 90°
•
Monitor Arm Rotary: plus or minus 150°
•
Monitor Neck Swivel: plus or minus 90°
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.
Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.
Figure 5-50 LCD Monitor - Positioning (17” LCD shown)
5-19-2-2
19” LCD
•
Side to side ± 33cm (± 15in)
•
Tilt/Rotate Adjustable Monitor
•
Tilt Angle: Up 20°, Down 90°
•
Rotate Angle: 90° right, 90° left
•
Fold-down and lock mechanism for transportation
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.
Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-77
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-19-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Wheels/Brakes
Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.
Table 5-55
Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions
Step
Task
1.
Press on pedal no. 2
Expected Result(s)
To engage the brakes in full lock
2.
Press on pedal no.1
To release the brake
3.
Press on pedal no.1
To engage swivel lock.
You may need to move the system around a
little to get the wheels to lock into the locked
direction.
4.
Press on pedal no. 2
To release swivel lock
NOTE:
5-78
The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main
brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the
swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from
rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated
in step 1.
Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-20
Air Flow Control
5-20-1
Air Flow Distribution
The fan at the rear of the scanner draws air into the scanner, through the foam filter, and pushes it
through a flange that moves the air into a cavity on top of the card rack.
Air holes in the bottom of this cavity allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits the card
rack through holes on its internal side panel into the interior of the scanner near the rear of the Backend
Processor.
The internal fan in the Backend processor draws the air into the PC allowing it to pass through the
interior of the PC, and exit the lower front area of the scanner.
Section 5-21
Service Platform
5-21-1
Introduction
The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and
cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to
e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The
Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-79
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-2
5-21-2-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Global Service User Interface (GSUI)
Internationalization
The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in
English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
5-21-2-2
Service Login
Select the wrench icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen. This icon links the user
to the service login screen.
NOTE:
In R4.x.x and after, the wrench icon has been removed from the upper display. To access the
Service Platform, click on Utility, then select Service.
Figure 5-51 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface
5-21-2-3
Access / Security
The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to
the tools that are authorized for their use.
NOTE:
OnLine Center access to the scanner requires a password and they must have ‘Disruptive’ permission
and customer input to run diagnostics.
Table 5-56 Service Login User Levels
User Level
Access Authorization
Operator
Administrator
Password
uls
Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same
acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service.
External Service
uls
gogems
Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is
viewable to authorized users.
5-80
Section 5-21 - Service Platform
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Service Home Page
The navigation bar at the top of the Customer Service Home Page screen allows the user to select from
several tools and utilities.
Figure 5-52 Customer Service Home Page
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-81
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Error Logs Tab
From the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit
selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users.
NOTE:
Beginning with R4.x application software, some of the Log Viewer screens are different than
those shown in this section. However, the basic functionality has not changed. Also, some
additional navigational features have been added, such as Last Page and Get Page.
The Filter Error log is keyed to GE Service login access permissions and is not available to customer
level analysis.
NOTE:
Beginning with R4.x application software, filtering has been removed and all users have the
same access to the logs.
The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance.
Table 5-57 Log Entry Key
Severity
Error Level
Color Code
1
Information
Green
2
Warning
Blue
3
Error
Red
The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD,
CD-Rom or DVD drive.
Figure 5-53 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries
5-82
Section 5-21 - Service Platform
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Logs
The eight sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Power, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board,
DICOM, and UPS Power.
NOTE:
Figure 5-53 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs.
Log table headings for the different logs are as follows:
•
System
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message, and
TouchPanel keystrokes (BT06).
•
Power
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Analog_5V, DC_5V, DC_3.3V, Pos_15V,
Analog_12V, Pos_HV, Neg_5V, Pos_100V, Neg_100V.
NOTE:
For systems running R2.x and R3.x application software, the log entry headings include Time
Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
NOTE:
In R4.x application software, the Power log present in R2.x and R3.x application software was
renamed UPS Power as described below.
NOTE:
All readings in the Power log are in mV. Readings for analog voltages will vary depending on
whether the system has an FEPS2.x or FEPS3.x. It is normal for the Pos_HV, Pos_100V, and
Neg_100V to read 0. Readings for these voltages are not captured in this log. To check these
voltages, run the Power Supply diagnostic.
NOTE:
NOTE:
•
Infomatics
Log entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight,
ExamID, ExamCategory, ExamCurDate, ExamStartTime, ExamEndTime, ActiveScanTime,
FreezeTime, TimeOfImageArchived, AccessionNumber, RefPhyName, ReadingPhyName,
Operator, RoomNo, BodyPatternSelected, InstitutionName, ActiveModeTime, CalculationMade,
CalculationTime, HelpUsage, ProductName, SystemSWRev, NoOfSWModules,
SystemPowerOnTime, SystemIdleTime, NoOfBoards, ProbeChangedDate, ProbeChangedTime,
ProbeChangedStatus, NoOfProbeSlots, NoOfProbes, ProbeID, ProbeSerialNumber, and
ActiveExamProbes.
•
Temperature
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Upper FEC Sensor, and Lower FEC
Sensor.
In R4.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package,
Average, TD0, TD1, TD2, TD3, TD4, TD5, TD6, TD7, EQOut, EQIn, and RFI.
•
Probe
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Error Message, Severity, Revision,
and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named.
•
Board
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Board, Severity, and two (2) new
labels that have yet been named.
•
DICOM
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
•
UPS Power
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
This log was called Power in R2.x and R3.x application software.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-83
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-4-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Utilities
The two sub-menus of the Utilities category are Plot Log, and Plot Page.
Plot Log
Plot Page
Figure 5-54 Utilities Sub-Menus
5-21-4-3
•
Plot Log
Allows for the color coded plot of all Log contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count
on the ‘y’ axis.
•
Plot Page
Allows for the color coded plot of all Page contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident
count on the ‘y’ axis.
Search
On the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to find.
This filter field works well for filtering the Sys log file for the word “fail”.
Figure 5-55 Search Sub-Menu
5-84
Section 5-21 - Service Platform
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-4-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Exit
The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer, returns the user to the Service Desktop home page.
Figure 5-56 Exit Log Sub-Menu
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-85
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics
Detailed Diagnostic information is found in Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting.
NOTE:
After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.
Figure 5-57 User Diagnostic Page
5-21-5-1
Diagnostics Execution
Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level
diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require
disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.
5-21-5-2
Diagnostic Reports
Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for
future viewing of the diagnostic logs.
5-86
Section 5-21 - Service Platform
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Image Quality
The Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues.
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
Figure 5-58 Image Quality Page
5-21-7
Calibration
The Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system.
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
Figure 5-59 Calibration Page
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-87
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-8
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration
The Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system.
The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration
subsystem.
The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page.
Starting with BT07 and later, this page contains the remote connectivity setup for InSite ExC.
Figure 5-60 Configuration Page
5-88
Section 5-21 - Service Platform
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Utilities
The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools such as System Shutdown, the Image Viewer
Utility, and the iLinq Configuration Utility.
Figure 5-61 Customer Utilities Page
5-21-10
Replacement
The Replacement page is intended to contain tools used to track replacement parts used in the system.
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
Figure 5-62 Part Replacement Page
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-89
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-21-11
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Planned Maintenance (PM)
The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system.
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
Figure 5-63 Planned Maintenance Page
5-90
Section 5-21 - Service Platform
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-22
4D Option
Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform 4D
scans.
5-22-1
Principle of Volume Acquisition
The underlying principle for 3D volume acquisition and reconstruction is the formation of an image
composed of multiple 2D scans at known elevation positions.
Central 2D-Scan
Start 2D_Scann
Range of VOL-Sweep
Figure 5-64 Volume Acquisition
The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by 2D scans with special transducers designed for 2D
scans, 3D sweeps, and real time 4D scans. These transducers have imbedded motors that control the
movement and positioning of the acoustic “stack”. The motor control box generates signals that
determine the direction and speed that the stack is driven. The motor controller also generates signals
sent to the Scan Control Board (routed through the internal IO) that are used for 3D image
reconstruction.
NOTE:
The fan on the motor control box is thermostatically controlled. Hence, the fan will only run when
necessary. You should note that the fan activates after a fairly short period of use of a 3D/4D
probe.
NOTE:
There are no LED indicators on the motor controller to aid in determining the presence/absence
of AC power to the box.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-91
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-22-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4D Block Diagram
Figure 5-65 4D BLock Diagram
5-22-2-1
Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable
The connection between the motor control box and the front bulkhead is a 15 pin sub-D (at the motor
controller) and a LEMO (at the bulkhead).
Table 5-58 maps the conversion from 15 pin sub-D to 7 pin Lemo.
Table 5-58
5-92
Motor Controller to Bracket Cable (2375551) and 4D Probe Cable (2384183) Pin
Conversions
Signal
Sub D 15 Pin on MC
Lemo on L9 (12 pin)
Lemo on Probe
Cable, 12 Pin
Lemo on Probe
Cable, 7 Pin
GND
7
4
4
1
SIN_DRV
1
8
8
2
SIN_RTN
2
7
7
3
ACTIVE
14
2
2
4
COS_RTN
4
5
5
5
COS_DRV
3
6
6
6
HALL1
5
3
3
7
Section 5-22 - 4D Option
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d)
.
6
8
1
1
2
12
7
9
7
2
5
3
6
4
11
10
5
4
3
Pin Diagram of 7 pin Lemo connector
on the small end of the 4D Probe Cable
Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector
on the large end of the 4D Probe Cable.
1
8
12
9
2
10
7
11
3
6
4
5
Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the L9 for the Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable.
Figure 5-66 Pin Diagrams
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-93
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d)
The pinout of the motor controller to the front bracket requires a 15 pin SUB-D female Connector (MC4)
with the following pinout:
Table 5-59
15-pin SUB-D Pinout for Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable
PIN
1
Signal name
In/Out
Out
SIN_DRV_1
Description
Sin1 Motor Drive Line
Characteristics
12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
9
SIN_RTN_1/
2
In/ Out
SIN_DRV_3
Sin1 Motor Return Line /
Sin3 Motor Drive Line
12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
10
COS_DRV_1
Out
Cos1 Motor Drive Line
12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
COS_RTN_1
In
Cos1 Motor Return Line
12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
5
HALL1
In
Null puls detector
5V TTL level
13
STRA1
In
Strobo generator sign.1
5V TTL level
6
STRB1
In
Strobo generator sign.2
5V TTL level
ACTIVE
Out
Pull down resistor in Mot-Ctrl_Box
Indicates that the Mot-Ctrl-Box is with 100 Ohm to GND
connected to the selected probe. Signal low = Mot-Ctrl-Box is
connected to sel. probe
3
11
4
12
14
5-22-2-2
7
GND
15
Reserved_1
IN
Reserved Input
5V TTL level
8
+ 5V
Out
Output
+ 5V low power
M1
GND
Screw of the housing
M2
GND
Screw of the housing
USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable
The connection between the motor control box and the PC backend requires a standard USB
compatible 5 pin USB female connector(MC2) with following pin out:
Table 5-60
USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable Pin Out
PIN
5-94
Signal name
In/Out
Description
Characteristics
1
VCC
2
DM
Data minus
USB 2.0 Compatible
3
DP
Data plus
USB 2.0 Compatible
4
GND
5
SHELL
IN
Power
Section 5-22 - 4D Option
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d)
The LOGIQ 9 3D/4D motor control box also includes a power supply with connection to the L9 110 VAC
power distribution (MC1).
5-22-2-3
Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable
A 9 pin SUB-D connection to the L9 Internal IO(MC3) requires the pin out as shown below.
Table 5-61
Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable Pin Out
PIN
Signal name
In/Out
Description
Characteristics
1
VOL_TR
Out
Sig. f. volume start
3,3V TTL level
6
FRAME_TR
Out
Sig. f. frame start
3,3V TTL level
2
DIRECTION
Out
indicate probe direction
3,3V TTL level
Out
Indicate cable connection to
Mot-Ctrl-Box
CONN_2
5
7
GND
3
GND
8
NC
4
Pull down resistor in mot-Ctrl_Box
with 100 Ohm to GND
Signal low = Mot_Ctrl_Box is
connected to L9 system
Not connected
RESET
IN
RESET for Hardware
9
NC
Not connected
M1
GND
Screw of the housing
M2
GND
Screw of the housing
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
3,3V TTL level
signal is low active
5-95
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-23
Continuous Wave Doppler Option
Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler scans.
The parts needed to perform Continuous Wave Doppler scans include:
5-23-1
•
PCI CW Doppler PWA card
•
Internal CW Doppler Cable
•
5 mHz or 8 mHz probe
•
Mu Metal Shield
Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow
The signal path for the CW probes is somewhat different from other LOGIQ™ 9 probes. The signal-path
from the probe does not pass through the card rack, it transitions directly from the probe to the back of
the BEP. The following block diagram depicts the functional elements of the PCI CW Doppler Card in
the BEP.
Tx Gain
2
2
Probe I.D.
Controller
2
Prog.
Block
Buffer
PCI I/F
PCI Bus
Transmitter
LIMO
Connector
16
Receiver
A/D
Local
Oscillator
Sampling Rate
Rx Gain
Figure 5-67 PCI CW Doppler PWA Block Diagram
In very simplified terms, the PCI CW Doppler PWA card generates the CW signal and sends it out C34
on the back of the BEP. The internal CW Doppler Cable transfers the signal from the BEP to the CW
Probe via a LEMO connector. The probe transmits the signal into the patient and receives the echo
back. The CW Doppler Board amplifies the received signal then sends it via the PCI Interface to PCI
Bus and on to the monitor.
5-96
Section 5-23 - Continuous Wave Doppler Option
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 5-24
PCI CW Doppler PWA card
The CW Doppler has a local controller that configures transmit and receive paths. The controller
performs all required signal processing in order to produce 16 bit signed integer I/Q data path.
The CW Doppler transmitter output power is controlled in 1 Volt increments. The output power is
adjustable continuously without stopping data collection.
The receiver gain is controlled between 0 and 100% max. gain and allows for 55 dB of gain and is
programmable without stopping data collection.
The CW Doppler has a PCI interface that acts as a bus master. An interrupt is generated via the PCI
Interface to the Host PC when the defined number of data samples has been acquired in the Block
Buffer. The contents of the Block Buffer is DMA'd into Host PC memory.
5-24-1
Internal CW Doppler Cable
The internal CW Doppler Cable connects between the PCI CW Doppler PWA to a LEMO brand
connector on the LOGIQ9 chassis. The Probe cable has the following pin assignments:
P1
J1
Conductor
Signal
1
2
Coax Center, red jacket
DOPIN
2
3
Coax shield, Red jacket.
DOPIN GND
4
5
W3
ID0
6
6
Coax center, wht jacket
PCW
5
7
Coax shield, Wht jacket.
PCW GND
3
8
W5
ID1
10
W1,W2 shield
HW1
W1,W2 shield
Shell
5-24-2
Probe Connector
The two probes connect to the system via a LEMO connector: FFA.3S.310.CLAC11. with pin
connections provided below. A Resistor, R1, must be installed as an identifier for the probe type:
•
5 MHz - 75 K ohm
•
8 MHz - 25 K ohm
Lemo
Conductor
Signal
2
Coax Center, red jacket
DOPIN
3
Coax shield, Red jacket.
DOPIN GND
5
R1-2
ID0
6
Coax center, wht jacket
PCW
7
Coax shield, Wht jacket.
PCW GND
8
R1-1
ID1
10
Outer shield
Shell
Outer shield
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)
5-97
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
5-24-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Mu Metal Shield
Mu metal shield is used to block flux field from the L9 isolation transformer mounted below the BEP.
5-98
Section 5-24 - PCI CW Doppler PWA card
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
6-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 6
This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out
of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified
personnel.
Table 6-1
Chapter 6 Contents
Section
Description
Page Number
6-1
Overview
6-1
6-2
Regulatory
6-1
6-3
Monitor
6-2
6-4
Panel Calibration
6-8
6-5
Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
6-8
6-6
Brake Arm Adjustment
6-13
6-7
Brake Adjustment
6-15
.
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The
covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed
Date
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the breaker.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even
if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Section 6-2
Regulatory
Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present
and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-1
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 6-3
Monitor
NOTE:
After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.
Contrast, brightness and degauss are adjusted using the three (3) keys located on the front of the
monitor just below the screen.
DECREASE
MENU
INCREASE
DECREASE
DECREASE
MENU
MENU
INCREASE
INCREASE
Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment Switches: CRT (left), 17” LCD option (center), and 19” LCD (right)
6-3-1
6-3-1-1
Monitor Adjustment (Standard only)
Degauss
Degaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the
monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct this
problem.
To activate the manual degauss:
1.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment button while the brightness/contrast adjustment
indicator is not displayed on the monitor. To cancel the manual degauss, press the <<< or >>>
adjustment button again.
2.) Press the toggle button for brightness and contrast.
3.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment.
NOTE:
6-2
The monitor automatically degausses at power on.
Section 6-3 - Monitor
P R E L I M I N A R Y
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-3-1-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Brightness and Contrast
Table 6-2
Brightness and Contrast - Standard
Room Condition
Contrast
Brightness
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology
85
35
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology
90
55
Bright Room
100
100
To calibrate CRT brightness and contrast, go to Utility -> Test Patterns -> Brightness Calibration. The
screen display will change as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 .
Record any changes to the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information with the
system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display
then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s).
Follow the instructions on the screen. Press the menu button (middle) to adjust the Contrast to 50. Press
the menu button again and adjust the Brightness to 100. Decrease the Brightness setting until the inner
gray is the same shade as the black box that surrounds it. This brightness setting should range between
35 to 55.
Final adjustment relies on customer approval. Cameras and printers may need to be adjusted to match
any monitor changes.
Figure 6-2 Monitor Brightness/Contrast Calibration Test Pattern - Standard
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-3
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-3-1-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Visible Image Display Adjustment
If you get a monitor where the image is smaller than the physical CRT displayed area, in other words
the image does not fill the screen, you can adjust the size of the visible image display:
1.) Press and HOLD the center button "brightness/contrast (icons)" for about 10 seconds or so, you'll
then see an expanded menu. This will allow you to adjust parameters like Color, Size/Center,
Geometry, etc. and Utility.
NOTE:
It is recommended that only the image size be adjusted as required and not anything else.
2.) Press the Left or Right Arrow buttons to highlight Size/Center then Press the Center button.
3.) Use the Center button to select H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size.
4.) Use the Left or Right Arrows to adjust H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size parameters.
5.) When complete use the Center button to select Exit and press the Left or Right arrow buttons
6.) Use the Left or Right Arrow buttons to select Exit and press the Center button to exit the main menu.
6-3-2
Monitor Tilt (Standard)
The monitor is capable of a full 10° forward and backward tilt. Although the default setting of the tilt
tension on the monitor should be adequate to tilt the monitor for your viewing preference, it can be easily
adjusted.
The monitor chassis is attached to the monitor mount plate that has a shaft that inserts into the top plate
of the scanner. This feature allows the monitor to swivel without need for adjustment.
The monitor mount plate has two points for adjustment.
6-3-2-1
Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure
Passing through the monitor mount plate on its underside is a large bolt, with a locking nut on its left
side, that provides the tension for monitor tilt. Adjust the tilt tension by loosening or tightening the locking
nut on this bolt.
NOTE:
The right side of this bolt will receive an Allen wrench to provide resistance when loosening and
tightening the locking nut.
6-3-2-2
Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure
At the back of the monitor mount plate is a nut securing a bolt passing through the shaft. This bolt has
a tapered end and several spring washers that when seated into the cylinder provides a proper counterbalance for the monitor.
6-3-2-3
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
Open-ended wrenches
6-3-2-4
Manpower
1 person, 1 hour + travel or
2 people, 1 hour + travel if the monitor needs to be removed.
6-4
Section 6-3 - Monitor
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-3-2-5
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Procedure
1.) Raise the Control Panel to a height that allows you to work underneath the monitor.
2.) Remove the eight (8) Phillips screws holding the Under Shelf Cover to the Shelf Cover Assembly.
3.) Remove four (4) Phillips screws holding the monitor Rear Cover Assembly to the monitor chassis.
4.) You now have access the monitor tilt and counter-balance adjustments. Adjust accordingly.
5.) Install the monitor rear cover assembly to the monitor chassis.
6.) Position the shelf cover assembly and secure it in place with the Under Shelf Cover and the eight
Phillips screws.
Monitor Mount Plate
Tilt Adjustment Bolt
Counter-balance Adjustment Bolt
Figure 6-3 Monitor Tilt Tension Adjustment
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-5
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-3-3
6-3-3-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only)
Brightness and Contrast
Table 6-3
Brightness and Contrast - 17” LCD
Room Condition
Contrast
Brightness
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology
90
55
Bright Room
100
100
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology
NOTE:
On the 17” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.
6-3-3-2
Angularity Test Pattern
An Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for
you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.
Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/
Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform
color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the
screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.
Figure 6-4 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 17” LCD
6-3-3-3
Color Settings
Table 6-4
6-6
Color Settings - 17” LCD
Temperature
Gamma
Saturation
Hue
15000K
2.6
0
0
Section 6-3 - Monitor
P R E L I M I N A R Y
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-3-4
6-3-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only)
Brightness and Contrast
Table 6-5
Brightness and Contrast - 19” LCD
Room Condition
Contrast
Brightness
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology
95
60
Bright Room
100
100
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology
NOTE:
On the 19” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.
6-3-4-2
Angularity Test Pattern
An Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for
you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.
Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/
Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform
color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the
screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.
Figure 6-5 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 19”LCD
6-3-4-3
Color Settings
Table 6-6
Color Settings - 19” LCD
Temperature
Gamma
Saturation
Hue
13000K
2.2
0
0
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-7
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 6-4
Panel Calibration
The Touch Panel Adjustment/Calibration procedure can be found in Section 7-6-1-1 “Calibration
Utilities” on page 7-23.
Section 6-5
Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
The operator panel can move up and down (Z direction). A gas spring in the scanner provides a counter
force to "balance" the weight of the operator panel and allows for positioning with minimal effort. A lever
on the main handle has a cable (similar to a bicycle cable) that provides the release for the gas spring.
This cable has one end attached to the release lever and the other end attached to the mechanism on
the gas spring piston.
6-5-1
Time Required
Approximately 1 person for 1 hour plus travel.
6-5-2
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
10mm open-end wrench
Two (2) small slotted screwdrivers
Needle-nose pliers
Small ruler
Large slotted screwdriver
3mm Allen wrench
6-5-3
DANGER
Preparations
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. COMPLETELY
POWER OFF AND SHUTDOWN THE SCANNER BEFORE SERVICING.
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.
6-8
Section 6-4 - Panel Calibration
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-5-4
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Z-Release Cable Adjustment
CAUTION Before making any adjustments, check the Z-release system to determine what adjustments
need to be made.
6-5-4-1
Checking the Release System
1.) Squeeze the Z-release lever and move the operator panel to its highest position. If this is not
possible, perform the necessary steps in Emergency Release Procedure on page 6-12.
2.) Place a small ruler next to the Z-release lever as shown in the Figure 6-6 below.
3.) Gently wiggle the Z-release lever and measure the amount of play in the lever.
4.) If this amount is 3mm or more, there is too much play in the cable. Perform the steps in the section
Z-Release Cable Adjustment on page 6-9 to reduce the amount of play in the cable.
5.) Attempt to lower the operator panel by pushing down on it. The operator panel should not move.
While continuing to push down, slowly squeeze the Z-release lever.
6.) Note the position of the Z-release lever when the operator panel starts to move. It should be 1/4 to
2/3 of the lever’s range of motion.
Z-Release Lever
Figure 6-6 Z-Release Measurement
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-9
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-5-4-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Cable Adjustment
1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw in the
cable adjustment screw to tighten the Z-release cable.
2.) If you cannot remove enough of the play in the cable using this adjustment, see Cable Adjustment
at Gas Spring on page 6-10
Underside of Z-Release Lever
Z-Release Cable
Cable Adjustment Screw
Underside of Screw Head
Halfway Between Casting
and Un-squeezed Lever
Figure 6-7 Z-Release Cable Adjustment Screw
6-5-5
6-5-5-1
Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring
Preparations
1.) If not already performed, Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.
2.) Remove the right- and left-side covers of the scanner .
3.) Remove the front cover of the scanner .
4.) Remove the black-and-white printer.
5.) Remove the VCR.
NOTE:
6-10
The height of the printer and VCR make them difficult to remove without first removing the front cover.
Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-5-5-2
Procedure
NOTE:
The operator panel must be at or near its highest position.
1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw out the
cable adjustment screw so the underside of the screw head is about half way between the casting
and the unsqueezed lever. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-10 .
2.) There is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Refer to Figure 6-8. Using 2 slotted
screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp.
Cable End
Wire Clamp
Forked Retainer
Figure 6-8 Gas Spring Mechanism
3.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the cable end which is above the clamp and pull upward to take up
any cable slack.
4.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp down along the cable so that it is nestled
back in the Forked Retainer.
WARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the forked retainer. If one of the tines
should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced at the factory.
5.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two
screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.
6.) Without squeezing the release lever, check that the forked retainer is in its fully up position.
7.) Squeeze the release lever and watch the forked retainer move down immediately as the lever is
squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or
slackened) with the cable adjustment screw per step 1.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-11
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-5-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Emergency Release Procedure
When the operator panel is at or near its highest position it is possible to see the gas spring mechanism
with the Black and White Printer or the VCR removed. If the operator panel is stuck in the down position,
it is not possible to see the gas spring mechanism as it is down behind the card rack. To avoid removing
the Card Rack to make adjustments, try this procedure to raise the operator panel.
1.) Using 3mm Allen Wrench, remove the shoulder bolt holding the release lever on the handle.
2.) Tilt the release lever down and pull on the cable as shown in the figure below. This will give
unlimited travel and hopefully release the gas spring. Push up on the operator panel while you are
pulling on the cable.
CAUTION Do NOT use excessive force!
Figure 6-9 Release Lever
3.) If you have no cable to pull (cable broken) or you are unable to release the gas spring in this
manner, you must remove the Card Rack to gain access to the gas spring mechanism.
6-5-7
Procedure Completion
1.) Install the VCR.
2.) Install the Black-and-White printer.
3.) Replace the front cover .
4.) Replace the side covers.
5.) If required, Power On / Bootup the scanner.
6-12
Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 6-6
Brake Arm Adjustment
Adjustments to the brake arm may be necessary if the pedals do not depress readily nor engage so the
front wheels lock in place and do not swivel.
6-6-1
Tools
Flat-head screwdriver
6-6-2
Manpower
One person, 1 hour + travel
6-6-3
Preparations
1.) Remove the front bumper.
TOP VIEW
Front Brake Arm
Adjustment Nuts
Swivel Lock Pedal /
Brake Pedal Release
Brake Pedal /
Swivel Lock Release
Brake Arm
Adjustment Rod
Figure 6-10 Brake Adjustment
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-13
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-6-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure
To adjust the brake arm it is recommended to separate both front adjustment nuts from the brake
assembly.
Adjustment Nuts
Retaining Nuts
Brake Clamp
Brake Assembly
Screwdriver
Figure 6-11 Front Adjustment Hardware
2.) Remove the brake clamps that are inserted through a small hole in the front adjustment nuts and
slipped over the nut at its collar.
3.) Loosen the front retaining nuts to allow room for adjustments.
4.) With a screwdriver you can pry the front adjustment nuts away from their connectors in the brake
assembly.
5.) Set the main brake - the brake assembly should be pulled to the left.
6.) Seat the right adjustment rod into the right adjustment nut under the right front wheel as far as it will
go.
7.) Seat the right front adjustment nut onto the adjustment rod as far as it will go.
8.) In order to insure that the same length of adjustment rod is seated into the two adjustment nuts you
will turn the adjustment rod one turn out of the rear adjustment nut under the front wheel and turn
the front adjustment nut off the adjustment rod a similar turn.
9.) Repeat this alternating rotation until the front adjustment nut lines up easily with the connector in
the brake assembly.
10.)Push the adjustment nut onto the brake assembly connector and secure the retaining nut tight
against the adjustment nut.
NOTE:
6-6-5
Repeat the same procedure to adjust the swivel lock. The only difference would be to set the swivel lock
prior to the adjustments.
Procedure Completion
1.) Install the front bumper.
6-14
Section 6-6 - Brake Arm Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 6-7
Brake Adjustment
6-7-1
Front Wheel Brakes
Service adjustment to the front brakes involve setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The
default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below.
6-7-1-1
Tools
Allen Wrenches
6-7-1-2
Manpower
One person, 1 hour + travel
6-7-1-3
Preparations
1.) Set the rear brakes to prevent the scanner from rolling.
2.) Remove the front bumper.
6-7-1-4
Front Brake Adjustment Procedure
Adjustment Hole
Allen Wrench to Adjust Brake
Wheel Brake
Figure 6-12 Front Brake Adjustment
1.) Refer to Figure 6-12. Use the Allen wrench to add more pressure in order to get more braking
action.
2.) If the brakes are too tight, loosen the adjustment with the Allen wrench.
3.) Check the brakes and readjust as necessary before replacing the front bumper.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-15
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-7-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment
Service adjustment to the rear brakes involves setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire.
The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below to remove the rear
wheel and adjust the brake.
WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE FLOATING KEYBOARD IS
LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED
AND THE SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE
IN THE LOCKED POSITION.
WARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING SCANNER. ELEVATING SCANNER WILL
MAKE IT UNSTABLE WHICH COULD CAUSE THE SCANNER TO TIP OVER.
6-7-2-1
Tools
Bottle Jack
Allen Wrenches
6-7-2-2
Manpower
One person, 1 hour + travel
6-7-2-3
Preparations
1.) Remove the left- and right-side covers.
2.) Remove the upper rear cover.
3.) Remove the lower rear cover.
6-16
Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
6-7-2
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment (cont’d)
2 screws removed
from top
Area on either side
of bottom shield used
to elevate scanner and
remove rear wheel.
Rear Brake
Set / Release
Handle
Brake
2 screws removed
from underside
Figure 6-13 Rear Brake Adjustment
6-7-2-4
Rear Wheel Removal Procedure
4.) Elevate the scanner by placing the bottle jack on the back frame on the side of the bottom shield of
the wheel you will be removing. You can also use a block of wood as a lever to raise the scanner
and place a second block of wood under the chassis to support the rear wheel off of the ground.
5.) Remove the four screws and remove the wheel from the scanner.
6.) Use an allen wrench to adjust the brake so it will properly “bite” and release the rear tire.
Figure 6-14 Rear Brake Adjustment
6-7-2-5
Rear Wheel Installation Procedure
1.) After adjusting the rear brake, install the rear wheel on the scanner. Hand tighten the four screws.
2.) Carefully lower the scanner and remove the bottle jack.
3.) Tighten the four screws using the weight of the scanner to provide resistance.
4.) Verify brake and scanner operation then replace all covers previously removed.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments
6-17
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
This page was intentionally left blank.
6-18
Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
Overview
7-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 7
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.
Table 7-1
Contents in Chapter 7
Section
Description
Page Number
7-1
Overview
7-1
7-2
Service Safety Considerations
7-2
7-3
Gathering Trouble Data
7-3
7-4
Screen Captures
7-13
7-5
Diagnostics
7-18
7-6
Acquisition Diagnostics
7-19
7-7
I/O Devices
7-24
7-8
Common Diagnostics
7-30
7-9
Utilities
7-33
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-1
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-2
Service Safety Considerations
DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNING IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER
IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
7-2
Section 7-2 - Service Safety Considerations
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-3
Gathering Trouble Data
7-3-1
Overview
There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs)
for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis.
There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.
7-3-2
Collecting Vital System Information
The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
-
Product Name = LOGIQ™ 9
From the Utility>System>About screen:
Applications Software
-
Software Version
-
Software Part Number
System Base Image Software
-
Base Image Revision
-
Image Part Number
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-3
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs
If the system malfunctions, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This Alt-D function is available at all
times, and collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and the following logs:
NOTE:
•
Keyboard Shadow Log
•
Error Logs
•
Crash Log
•
Vital Product Data
•
DICOM Logs (Beginning with R3.x.x S/W)
•
Windows Event Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
•
Windows Modem Log (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
•
Diagnostic Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
•
Service Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ 9.
Example of R2.x.x screen
Example of R3.x.x and after screen
Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box
When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box opens. Enter the following information:
•
System ID serial number.
•
Software version.
•
Date and time of occurrence.
•
Sequence of events leading to issue.
•
Is the issue repeatable?
•
Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
•
Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
•
Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
-
7-4
A choice to store to a pre-formatted MOD (H: drive), CD-RW, USB memory stick, or to the
Export directory D: drive (for remote viewing through InSite).
Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs (cont’d)
NOTE:
Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
NOTE:
The USB memory stick option is only available in R4.0.x and after. To save to a USB memory
stick you must insert the stick in the lower front of the console , prior to starting Alt-D, then the
memory stick will appear as a destination. Do not attach the memory stick in the Wired
Microphone port on the control panel.
NOTE:
You MUST select H: or CD-RW as the destination device, otherwise the data is written to the
default Export directory on the hard drive. The EXPORT directory is only used for InSite. It is
not intended for FEs or Customer use; therefore, choose the H: drive which is the MOD or
choose the CD-RW.
NOTE:
NOTE: If writing to a CD be sure that it is preformatted.
The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates
the possibility of artifacts from compression.
Double check the CD or MOD that you made to ensure it contains at least two files. An example is
shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image & Logs File
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-5
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer
A sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it.
1.) Access the Windows Desktop using the service dongleFrom the Start menu, select Programs >
Distinct > Network Monitor.
The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens (Figure 7-3).
Figure 7-3 Distinct Network Monitor screen
2.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen (Figure 7-3), select CONFIGURE.
The Configuration screen opens.
Figure 7-4 Configuration screen
7-6
Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-4
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
Steps 3 - 9 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this system’s network activity.
If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will
capture all network activity, not just this system’s.
3.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-5), select the Filters tab > New Filter.
Confirm “built-in templates” is selected, and select CREATE.
The Select Filter Task screen opens (Figure 7-6).
.
Figure 7-5 Configuration - Filters tab
Figure 7-6 Select Filter Task screen
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-7
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
4.) On the Select Filter Task screen (Figure 7-6), select “Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more
IP addresses”, then select NEXT.
The Enter Filter Settings screen opens (Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7 Enter Filter Settings
5.) On the Enter Filter Settings screen, enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the ADD
button (Figure 7-7). Repeat this step for all IP addresses you wish to add, then select FINISH.
The Enter Filter Settings screen closes.
6.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-8).
7-8
Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
7.) In the Filter to Apply field, select “My Computer”.
Figure 7-8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
8.) Select CLOSE.
The Configuration screen closes.
9.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play).
NOTE:
The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop.
10.)Double-click on the Go Mushashi icon to start the system application.
11.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS,
etc.).
Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-9
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
12.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager.
On BT07 systems and later, select Exit to close the application and return to Windows. Then open
Windows Task Manager to open the Distinct Network Monitor screen.
Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
13.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button.
The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.
7-10
Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
14.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-3), select Capture > Stop.
After stopping the data collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-10 opens.
Figure 7-10 Capture Data sample
15.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name “D:\log\Sniffer\MyLog “.
16.)Select SAVE.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-11
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
17.)On the Save As Capture File Dialog (Figure 7-11), select SAVE.
Figure 7-11 Save As Capture File
18.)Check the D:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files:
MyLog.cap, MyLog.num.
19.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.
7-12
Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-4
Screen Captures
There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the
screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving
the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key.
The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the
default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P4 Key function. Therefore,
screen capture should involve the following steps:
1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print4 button.
2.) Set the Print4 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture.
3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive, MOD, CD-R, DVD-R or USB Memory Stick.
4.) Restore the Print4 button to it’s original settings.
7-4-1
Check and Record the P4 Key Function
Check the function of the Print 4 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom
settings.
1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.
2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.
3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.
4.) In the Button field, select Print4.
The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-12 on page 7-13 .
Figure 7-12 Buttons Set Up Screen
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-13
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Check and Record the P4 Key Function (cont’d)
P4 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as
shown in Figure 7-12, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings.
5.) In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. The destinations list displays
the following information:
*
Name: user defined during service configuration
*
Type: the type of service
*
Server: the device for which the service was configured
*
Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
6.) In the Image generated section, record the parameters related to the service.
7-4-2
Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture
If the P4 Key is not set to screen capture:
1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection
menu in the Destinations section.
2.) From the drop down menu select CopyToWflow_01>Image to Buffer>MyComputer>Out.
3.) Ensure that the Image generated section for capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary
Capture and No Image Compression.
4.) The P4 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image
buffer (clipboard).
7-14
Section 7-4 - Screen Captures
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-4-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing a Screen
The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner:
1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.
2.) Press P4. This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom
of the scan image display.
Menu
Clipboard
Thumbnails
Figure 7-13 Select Image to Capture
3.) Select SCAN from the touch panel to view the image screen and the snapshots displayed on
the bottom.
4.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive, MOD or CD-R.
5.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS.
Save As
Figure 7-14 Menu > Save As
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-15
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-4-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Capturing a Screen (cont’d)
Figure 7-15 Save Dialog Box
6.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the
image on the hard disk, MOD or CD-R.
7-4-4
Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality
If the customer had programmed the P4 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that
functionality recorded in 7-4-1 on page 7-13. Refer to Figure 7-12.
1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.
2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.
3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.
4.) In the Button field, select Print4.
5.) In the Destinations section, select the service(s) recorded in step 5, Section 7-4-1. The
destinations list displays the following information:
NOTE:
*
Name: user defined during service configuration
*
Type: the type of service
*
Server: the device for which the service was configured
*
Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
Only output services can be associated to the print keys.
6.) In the Image generated section, select the parameters related to the service recorded in
step 6, Section 7-4-1.
7-16
Section 7-4 - Screen Captures
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-4-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut
Starting with R4.x.x software, a Ctrl-PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image
displayed on the system. Images captured using this shortcut are saved in the D:\export directory using
both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw DICOM (.dcm) formats.
7-4-5-1
To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut
1.) With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc keys simultaneously.
2.) From the touchpanel, select Utilities -> Service -> Scanner Utilities -> Image, Compress, and Delete
Utilities.
3.) Enter a checkmark in the checkbox next to the image(s) to save in the D:\export directory.
4.) Select Compress File.
A compressed file of the images is stored in d:\export. You may rely on the date and time of the
Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent image recorded. The uncompressed files are
stored in d:\export\service\image.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-17
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-5
Diagnostics
NOTE:
Detach probes and reboot system after performing any diagnostics.
As described in Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory), the service platform uses a webbased user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components.
The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Acquisition Diagnostics,
I/O Devices and Common Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual
tests.
Figure 7-16 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen
7-18
Section 7-5 - Diagnostics
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-6
Acquisition Diagnostics
NOTE:
After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.
Acquisition Diagnostics is one of three main headings under the GSUI Diagnostics Tab.
Figure 7-17 Customer Acquisition Diagnostics
Individual selections run diagnostics and return status information identifying any problems.
When you select a test to run, the display changes as shown.
1.) Instructions Frame
-
Displays either a test-specific text or the default instructions.
2.) Status Frame
-
Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts,
the frame displays the “current” status of all test results.
-
The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and
Operator Feedback.
3.) Execute Button
-
This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:
-
Execute - to start the diagnostic
-
Abort - to stop a diagnostic
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-19
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 7-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Acquisition Diagnostics (cont’d)
4.) Loop Count
-
This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the
switch is configured as an “execute” switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried
to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.
5.) Progress Indicator
-
Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.
6.) Short Text Message
-
Displays brief messages about the test’s progress during execution.
7.) Status Frame Background Color
7-20
-
Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to
indicate completion status.
-
Code Status Fail = Red
-
Code Status Pass = Green
-
Code Status neither Pass nor Fail (Example: Aborted) = Gray (default color).
Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-6-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostic Listings
Table 7-2
Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing
Diagnostic/Utility
SCB PCI Interface Diag
SCB Memory Diag
SCB DSP Diag
Function
Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the SCB via the secondary PCI bus
Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
Tests the Scan Sequencer’s DSP and associated components.
SCB Scan Bus Diag
Tests the local Scan Bus and the associated system timing.
SCB Image Port Diag
Tests the Image Port’s functionality.
BMP PCI Interface Diag
Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the BMP via the PCI bus.
BMP Memory Diag
Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
BMP Signal Path Diag
Tests the entire BMP signal path.
EQ PCI Interface Diag
Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the registers and memory on the EQ via
the PCI bus.
EQ Memory Diag
EQ Signal Path Diag
TD Memory Diag
TD Analog Reference Diag
Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
Tests the entire EQ signal path.
Tests all of the on-board memory, for all installed TD boards, including registers.
Tests the AD_REF and VREF voltages on the TD.
Comprehensive Signal Path Diag
Tests the signal path of every channel from the TD Rigel Transmitter Memories to the
SCB, via both the EQ and the BMP.
TD Access Diag
Tests all of the Access Modes utilized for Host/TD communication as well as Channel
RAM to Rigel transfers.
Analog TGC Diag
Tests the generation of the analog TGC voltage.
XDIF Interface Diag
Tests all of the XDIF functionality that is testable without a probe or probe simulator
attached to the system, including the IIC communication.
Power Supply Diag
Tests the system voltages available on the EQ.
Temperature Diag
Tests the temperature of the system, wherever available.
Noise Floor Diag
Measures the noise floor of the system. The noise floor will be calculated form IQ data
received without a signal source.
Loopback Diag
Tests the analog front-end of the system.
Acquisition Hardware Information Utility Writes a file for each Acquisition Hardware FRU containing all Vital Product Data.
Transmit Utility - Start
Transmit Utility - Change Channel
Transmit Utility - Stop
Receive Utility - Single Frame
Receives signal on one channel at a time.
Receive Utility - 8 Frames
Visual Channel Utility
High Voltage Reset Utility
Set VRF Utility
Tests whether all TD boards can detect a high voltage fault.
Set the analog VREF to a specified value.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 7-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing (Continued)
Diagnostic/Utility
Function
Set TGC Utility
Set the analog TGC to a specified value.
Probe Select Utility
Select a probe connector to be active.
Probe ID Read Utility
Read the Probe ID of all installed probes.
Touchscreen Calibration Utility.
Start Touchscreen Verification Utility.
Front-End Calibration Utility
Calibrates the Touch Screen.
Helps verify the touchscreen calibration.
Measures the Front End DC Offset, Gain, and Phase.
System Restart
Test system restart
System Shutdown.
Tests system shutdown.
OP Panel Interface
Tests the OP Panel interface.
System Power Button Test
Tests the system Power Button.
IIC PCI-DGVIC Diag
Tests the IIC slave devices on the PCI-DGVIC board
IIC IIO Diag
Tests the IIC slave devices on the Internal IO board.
IIC EIO Diag
Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.
IIC EIO Upper Diag
Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.
PC2IP IIC Troubleshooting Procedure Procedure featured with tests that guides and helps you to troubleshoot PC2IP IIC
Step1 through 5
failures.
Footswitch Test Utility
PC Diagnostics Interactive tests
PC Diagnostics Non-Interactive tests
NOTE:
Tests the system Power Button.
Tests std PC components (CPU, Hard Drive, Memory, CD/DVD drives) automatically.
Tests standard PC components (keyboard, audio, monitor) non- interactively.
In R4.x software and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed.
.
DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNING IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER
IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
7-22
Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-6-1-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Calibration Utilities
Touchscreen Calibration: Follow the directions on the Touchscreen. As each of the cross-hairs
appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser. You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair
until it moves to the next location. If you just tap the calibration cross-hair, there is a better than average
chance your calibration will be corrupt.
NOTE:
Do NOT use sharp, pointed objects to press on the Touchscreen. You should also be careful if
you have long, sharp finger nails. The Touchscreen can be damaged by sharp objects.
After all the cross-hairs are touched the screen is calibrated.
Start/Stop Touchscreen Verification: Select START TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and
EXECUTE. The Start Touchscreen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small
red dots appears.
To terminate the verification, select STOP TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE.
Front-End Calibration Utility - DC Offset: All probes must be disconnected. Measures the DC offset
of each channel and writes a calibration file for use in zeroing the offset. Application code may utilize
these values to zero each channel's DC offset, by programming the Rigel beam forming ASIC's on TD's.
NOTE:
In R4.x and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed. Do not run this diagnostic
test in previous versions of software.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-23
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-7
I/O Devices
lThe Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program (GE Test App) available through the
Service Platform.
7-7-0-1
Launching the Op Panel Test
1.) Log onto the Service Platform, and select the Diagnostics tab.
2.) Locate the Op Panel Test under I/O Devices > Op Panel Utilities > Op Panel Interface.
3.) Select Start to launch the GE Test App.
An hour glass displays on the Service Platform window. The GE Test App window is hidden behind
the Service Platform window.
4.) When the hour glass displays, minimize the Service Platform window to reveal the GE Test App
window. See Figure 7-18.
a.) To minimize, move the cursor to the “-” minus icon at upper right hand corner of the window.
b.) Press the Set key.
Figure 7-18 Select System Type
5.) On the Startup tab, select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test interface. The other
buttons on the Startup tab will now be active. See Figure 7-19.
7-24
Section 7-7 - I/O Devices
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-6-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostic Listings (cont’d)
Detach and Other Buttons Active
Attach Button Active
Figure 7-19 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab
6.) Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel.
7-7-1
Trackball Tab
Test the trackball functionality by moving the pointer over the blue box. See Figure 7-20. Verify that the
X and Y position are updated as the pointer is moved.
Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Trackball Tab
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-25
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-7-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Keyboard Tab
Test the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard. Verify that the corresponding key is
highlighted when each key is pressed. See Figure 7-21.
NOTE:
The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed.
Figure 7-21 Keyboard Tab
7-7-3
Slidepots Tab
Test the slidepot (TGC) functionality by moving each slidepot through its range. See Figure 7-22. Verify
that the visual and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved.
Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons. See Figure 7-22. Visually verify the
LED functionality on the upper operator panel.
Figure 7-22 Slidepots Tab
7-26
Section 7-7 - I/O Devices
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-7-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Encoders Tab
Test the encoder functionality by rotating each encoder knob. See Figure 7-23. Verify that the position
is updated as the encoder is moved.
Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed. See Figure 7-23.
Figure 7-23 Encoders Tab
7-7-5
Pushbuttons Tab
Test the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel. Verify that the
corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Pushbuttons Tab
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-27
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-7-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
LEDs Tab
Test the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App. See Figure 7-25. Verify
that the corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected.
Figure 7-25 LEDs Tab
7-7-7
Touchscreen Tab
Test the touchscreen functionality by pressing on the touch screen of the upper operator panel. Verify
that the press is indicated in the black window by a highlighted circle. See Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-26 Touchscreen Tab
7-28
Section 7-7 - I/O Devices
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-7-8
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Ending the Program
1.) When you have finished testing the Op Panel, close the GE Test App.
2.) In the Service Platform window, click on the Stop button.
3.) Close the Service Platform window.
4.) Shutdown the system and reboot.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-29
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-8
Common Diagnostics
Common Diagnostics is the second main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics.
Figure 7-27 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their
respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below.
Figure 7-27 Common Diagnostics
7-8-1
Utilities
Provides two selections:
7-8-1-1
Disruptive Mode
Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting.
7-8-1-2
System Shutdown
Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System.
Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not.
After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel
the request.
7-30
Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-8-2
7-8-2-1
7-8-2-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
PC Diagnostics
Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier
•
CPU Test
•
Hard Drive Tests
•
Memory Tests
•
CD/DVD Drive Tests (BEP3.x only)
•
Video Test
•
USB Test
•
PCI Board Configuration Test
•
SCSI Device Test (This test normally fails since the Logiq 9 does not have any SCSI device)
•
AGP Video Card Test (This test is aborted, n/a for L9 BT04 or earlier)
•
Network Test
Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09
•
Essential Tests (PCI bus, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Hard drive status and Random seek,
Network interface loopback only). It runs some of the tests below.
•
System board (it tests PCI Bus communication, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Parallel Port and
Network Interface loopback only)
•
Hard disk surface (over an hour, tests Drive status, Random seek, Surface scan test)
•
Hard disk quick test (takes about 6 min)
•
PCI Bus
•
Video card (it takes about 6 min)
•
Network interface (system needs to be connected to the network)
•
CMOS
•
DRAM memory
•
Parallel port
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-31
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-8-3
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests)
•
7-32
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Audio Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)
•
Keyboard Test
•
Midi - LOGIQ™ 9 does not support MIDI channels. If you try and run the MIDI test, the test may fail
(Not available in BT04, BT06, BT07, or BT09)
•
Monitor Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)
Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 7-9
Utilities
7-9-1
Dicom Verify Utility
This utility provides an easy way to verify DICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices
on the network. See Figure 7-28.
NOTE:
To monitor possible network issues for BT06 and later systems, the Dicom Verify Utility can be
placed in a loop to run continuously until turned off. The BT06 Dicom Verify Utility screen has
a checkbox at the bottom to enable the continuous loop.
Figure 7-28 Dicom Verify Utility - BT04
Figure 7-29 Dicom Verify Utility - BT06 or Later
1.) Enter the AE Title, IP Address, and Port Number for the DICOM device.
2.) Click on the Verify button.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-33
1/18/10
CHAPTER7.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
7-9-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Dicom Verify Utility (cont’d)
3.) Examine the utility error output. See Figure 7-30 for an example.
Figure 7-30 Example Error Messages
7-9-1-1
•
In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.
•
In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.
•
In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.
Hard Drive Failure
The symptoms of hard drive failures are as follows:
•
The results of hard drive diagnostics may indicate bad sectors on the hard drive.
•
The system may not boot because of bad sectors on the hard drive.
•
Attempts to re-image the C: partition may fail because of bad sectors on the C: partition.
•
The system may not boot and displays blue screen stop errors (dark blue screen with white text “blue screen of death”).
In the event of a hard drive failure, determine whether or not the customer requires recovery of data. If
the customer requires data recovery, collect the following information from the customer:
•
Customer contact name
•
Customer contact phone
•
Customer contact address
•
What data they require (e.g. studies for a date range or everything)
•
Whether the customer wants their data on CD or DVD media
Tell the customer GE will attempt to recover as much data as possible. Write a complaint and include
the above information, and do not discard or return the failed hard drive. A member of the Complaint
Handling Unit or the Installed Base team will contact the author of the complaint and provide instructions
for delivery of the failed hard drive to engineering. Engineering will then recover as much data as
possible and send the recovered data directly to the customer.
7-34
Section 7-9 - Utilities
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
8-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 8
This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems. Follow all
safety precautions while servicing and repairing this equipment.
Table 8-1
Chapter 8 Contents
Section
Description
Page Number
8-1
Overview
8-1
8-2
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
8-4
8-3
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2
8-7
8-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
8-10
8-5
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
8-13
8-6
Before Starting a Software Load
8-17
8-7
Image Management Guide
8-18
8-8
Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-26
8-9
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
8-33
8-10
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
8-38
8-11
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-44
8-12
Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
8-49
8-13
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
8-56
8-14
Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
8-61
8-15
System Setup
8-65
8-16
Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-70
8-17
Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-72
8-18
Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
8-74
8-19
Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
8-86
8-20
Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
8-92
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-1
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-1-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back
Left
Front
Rear
Figure 8-1 Console Views
8-2
Section 8-1 - Overview
Right
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-1-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation
industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE:
The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
WARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL
PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard
drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL
PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard
drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-3
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-2
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
8-2-1
Manpower
One person, .5 hour + travel
8-2-2
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
8-2-3
Preparations
We anticipate, with the exception of a failure, batteries will only need to be replaced once every three
years.
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.
2.) Remove the left-side cover.
8-2-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure
1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.
2.) Remove the four screws from the power supply battery pack cover plate.
3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.
4.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
1
3
2
4
Figure 8-2 Removing / Installing the Power Supply Battery Pack
8-4
Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-2-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1
Heat-shrink holds batteries together
and insulates terminals.
In Line
20A Fuse
Label to be
attached to
this surface
+
Spacer
seperates
batteries
-
Battery 1
-
Battery 2
+
Compression tape used to
minimize battery pack movement
while installed in chassis
Figure 8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack
1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.
2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the four screws removed .
3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.
4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the
power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does
not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.
6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-2
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-3
Standby Mode
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4
Peripheral Checks
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-2.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-5
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-2-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 (cont’d)
The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the OFF condition. The OFF condition is:
-
Circuit Breaker in the OFF position
-
System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system
may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the
UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system
input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
8-2-6
Battery Disposal
Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
8-6
Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-3
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2
8-3-1
Manpower
One person, 15 minutes + travel
8-3-2
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
8-3-3
Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.
2.) Remove the left-side covers.
8-3-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure
1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.
2.) Remove the screw from the power supply battery pack cover plate. See Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate
3.) Tip the power supply battery pack cover plate forward and lift up to remove, refer to Figure 8-5.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-7
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-3-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d)
Figure 8-5 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate Tipped Forward
4.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.
5.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
8-3-5
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2
1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.
2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the screw removed .
3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.
4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the
power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does
not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.
6.) Replace the left-side cover .
7.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system .
8-8
Section 8-3 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-3-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 (cont’d)
8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-3
8-3-6
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-3
Standby Mode
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4
Peripheral Checks
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-3.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready
for use. “
Battery Disposal
Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-9
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
8-4-1
Manpower
One person, 15 minutes + travel
8-4-2
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
8-4-3
Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.
2.) Remove the left-side cover.
8-4-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure
1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.
2.) Unplug the sidefan connection. Be careful not to pinch the wires when replacing cover.
Figure 8-6 BEP 3 with cover removed
8-10
Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-4-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires. See Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Disconnect Battery Pack Connection Wires
4.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8 BEP 3.x One Power Supply Battery Pack Removed
5.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 BEP 3.x Both Power Supply Battery Packs Removed
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-11
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-4-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.
2.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.
3.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the
power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does
not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
4.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.
5.) Replace the left-side cover
6.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system
7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-4
8-4-6
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-3
Standby Mode
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4
Peripheral Checks
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-4.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
Battery Disposal
Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
8-12
Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-5
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
8-5-1
Manpower
One person, 15 minutes + travel
8-5-2
Tools
Phillips screwdriver
8-5-3
Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.
2.) Remove the left-side cover.
8-5-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x
1.) Remove the cover from the Back End Processor (BEP) by loosening the thumb screw on the back.
2.) Unplug the side fan.
NOTICE
Whenever accessing internal BEP components, ensure the wires are clear. Avoid pinching or
damaging the wires or cables.
Figure 8-10 BEP 4.x
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-13
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-5-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d)
3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires.
Figure 8-11 Battery Pack Connection Wires
4.) Remove the 8 screws holding the battery pack bracket.
Figure 8-12 BEP 4.x
8-14
Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-5-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d)
5.) Take bracket off.
Figure 8-13 Remove Bracket
6.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
7.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
Figure 8-14 Remove Battery Pack
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-15
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-5-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x
1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.
2.) Replace the bracket.
3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.
4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the
power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does
not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
5.) Reattach the side fan wires.
6.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor. Be careful not to pinch the fan wires when replacing
the cover.
7.) Replace the left-side cover.
8.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system.
9.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-5
8-5-6
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-3
Standby Mode
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4
Peripheral Checks
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-5.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
Battery Disposal
Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
8-16
Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-6
Before Starting a Software Load
8-6-1
Printers
Any customized print settings will be lost when the new base image is loaded prior to R6.x.x. If the
customer has any on board, peripheral, or network printers, any settings they have made in the device
driver, such as Gray Scale Images, will be lost. These printer settings will need to be recorded. Go to
Utilities>System>Peripherals>Printers in order to record the printer settings.
8-6-2
Save Connectivity Settings
8-6-2-1
DICOM TCPIP Settings
NOTE:
DICOM Workflows and DICOM Device Configurations are saved when you preform the
User-Defined backup procedure in Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page
8-22.
If you want to Import exams back on to your system after the software load, you should record any vital
DICOM data before proceeding.
1.) Select Utilities>Connectivity>TCPIP tab and record all information on that tab with particular
attention to:
-
The “Enable DHCP” box should NOT be checked
-
Computer Name: ______________________________
-
IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________
-
Subnet Mask: ______/________/________/________
-
Default Gateway: ______/________/________/________
-
Remote Archive IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________
-
Remote Archive Name: ______________________________________
For BT07 and later, service settings can be saved along with the user-defined configuration.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-17
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-7
Image Management Guide
8-7-1
Managing Patient Data and Presets
Save to MOD, CD-R or DVD-R any patient data, images, and system presets that have been stored or
configured. Installing the base operating software may delete some patient data, images and system
setups saved on the system.
NOTE:
Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base operating
software.
8-7-1-1
Patient Images and Data
EZBackup/Move
Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from LOGIQ™ 9 to DVD-R,
CD-R or MOD.
Refer to Section 8-7-2 "EZBackup/Move" on page 8-19.
8-7-1-2
Preset Data
User-Defined Backup Protocols
Use this to copy User-Defined presets before doing a base image software load.
Refer to Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22.
8-7-1-3
Backup Media
DVD Media Requirements
Only DVD-R. DO NOT use DVD-RW or DVD+R.
CD-ROM Media Requirements
Only use CD-R CD-ROMs, DO NOT use CD-RW CD-ROMs. Also, the CD-R CD-ROM MUST
support 16x writing speed or greater.
CD-ROM Handling Tips
To eject the CD, always press F3. DO NOT press the eject button on the CD-ROM/DVD Drive.
Always finalize the CD-ROM. This allows you to read the CD-ROM on any other PC.
DO NOT finalize the CD if you want to add more images to the CD.
8-18
Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-7-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
EZBackup/Move
EZBackup/Move allows you to manage hard disk space (move images off the hard drive) while
maintaining the patient database on the scanner, as well as to back up the patient database and
images.
1.) Specify the EZBackup/Move setup on the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page.
Figure 8-15 Utility > System > Backup/Restore Preset Menu
Table 8-6
EZBackup/Move Preset Parameters
Preset Parameter
Description
Reminder Dialog Interval days
Specify the number of days after the last backup that you want the system to prompt you to
perform an EZBackup/Move procedure (only for moving images).
Enable Reminder Dialog
Select to activate the EZBackup/Move reminder pop-up dialog.
Backup files older than in days
The system will backup images older than the number of days specified here. If you enter a
zero (0), then all of the images from today on will be backed up.
Move files after backup
Check this box to delete images from the hard drive after the backup.
Media
Select media type.
Media capacity for estimate (MB) Specify the capacity of the backup media.
2.) To start the EZBackup/Move procedure, go to the Patient menu and select the EZBackup/Move
button at the lower right-hand position of the Patient list.
The EZBackup/Move Wizard starts.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-19
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-7-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
EZBackup/Move (cont’d)
Figure 8-16 New Patient EZBackup/Move Example
NOTE:
EZBackup/Move can take up to 20 minutes (or longer, depending on the size of the backup).
Make sure to schedule this at the same time daily, when no patients are scheduled.
3.) Verify the information on the first page of the EZBackup/Move Wizard, then press Next.
Figure 8-17 EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 1
8-20
Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-7-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
EZBackup/Move (cont’d)
NOTE:
You do not need to format the media prior to performing an EZBackup/Move.
NOTE:
EZBackup/Move cannot span a single image across two (2) or more media. Therefore, if
EZBackup/Move encounters an image that is greater than the capacity of the media, it skips the
oversized image.
NOTE:
EZBackup/Move does not store images to media in sequential order. Instead it maximizes the
most amount of images per media.
4.) Verify the information on the EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 2.
The backup may span multiple media. This page tells you how many media you need to do this
backup. After you have gathered the media (allow for one extra media, just in case), you are ready
to begin the backup. Press Next.
5.) A pop-up message appears that provides you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the
media. Press OK.
6.) The status menu appears. When the backup/move has been completed, press Next.
NOTE:
When/if you need to insert the next media, a message appears providing you with the media
label. Label the media, then insert the next media and press OK.
7.) When the backup is complete, the Backup completed page appears.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-7-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
User-Defined Backup Protocols
1.) Insert the backup media. Format the CD-R or MOD. (DVD-R do not need to be formatted.) Select
the Utility tab on the Measurement Selection Menu. Select Connectivity->Tools. Label the media.
A pop-up menu displays when the formatting is complete, see Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-18 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen
Figure 8-19 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen - BT04 and after
2.) Press Ok to continue. Verify that the format was successful.
8-22
Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-7-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)
Figure 8-20 Format Successful Pop-up Menu
3.) On the Touch Panel, press Utility.
4.) On the Utility Touch Panel, press System.
5.) On the monitor display, select Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore screen opens.
NOTE:
If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on
with administrator privileges.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-23
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-7-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)
Figure 8-21 Backup Menu- Prior to R4.x.x
Figure 8-22 Backup / Restore Screen - R4.x.x and R6.x.x
8-24
Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-7-3
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)
The detailed section of this menu decouples the user defined configuration above. This allows
you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines. Refer to Chapter
16 “Customizing Your System” in the Basic User Manual for more information.
6.) In the Backup list, select the items you wish to backup.
7.) In the Media field, select MOD, CD or DVD.
8.) Select Backup.
9.) Answer ‘Ok’ to the following pop-up message as many times as the number of items you are
backing up.
The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the
Backup/Restore screen.
Figure 8-23 Back-up Confirmation Message
10.)After the backup is complete, press F3 to eject the media.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-25
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-8
Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-8-1
Preparations
Save Connectivity Settings as described in 8-6-2 on page 8-17.
NOTE:
Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base image
software.
NOTE:
After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight
Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab
-> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.
NOTE:
While it is believed to be unnecessary, it would not hurt to disconnect the system from the
network and remove all transducers.
NOTE:
Be sure all printers are connected and turned on. If a printer is plugged in at this time it will
automatically install and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.
NOTE:
If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.
If the system you are loading software on has a BEP 2, please complete steps 1 - step 5 below. If the
system you are loading software on has a BEP1 or BEP3, proceed to step 2 of 8-8-2 "Base Image Load
Procedure - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-28.
NOTE:
8-8-1-1
How to differentiate BEPs easily
-
If the MOD is 640M it should be BEP1.
-
If the MOD is 1.3G it should be BEP2.X.
-
There is no MOD on BEP3 and it has two USB ports.
To Prepare to Load Base Image
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power
source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on
the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
8-26
Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-8-1-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
To Prepare to Load Base Image (cont’d)
2.) Remove the left side cover.
3.) Unplug the microphone input (C11) from the BEP, see Figure 8-24 on page 8-27 .
4.) Wrap the cable end of the plug using electrical tape to isolate it from the BEP.
By disconnecting the microphone input, you eliminate feedback during the software load. This input
may have been unplugged previously, if so, be sure it is wrapped and leave it disconnected.
C11
Audio In
Figure 8-24 BEP2 Cable Identification
5.) Replace the left side cover.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-27
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-8-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior
WARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner.
1.) Turn on the scanner.
2.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, Disk 1 of 2” into the CD-ROM/DVD
drive.
NOTE:
There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.
NOTE:
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load CD version
for BEP 2.x or BEP3.
3.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the On / Off switch. Select Shutdown from
the System Exit menu. Wait for the On / Off switch to turn amber.
Figure 8-25 Shutdown Dialog Box
NOTE:
If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.
4.) If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the Standby Switch until the light turns from
green to amber.
8-28
Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-8-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
5.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a message displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in
Figure 8-26 on page 8-29 .
Figure 8-26 Base Load Warning Message
Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.
6.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-29
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-8-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
Figure 8-27 Base Load Option Screen
The first choice is to load the complete hard drive.
[1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.
NOTE:
APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE
HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!
Figure 8-28 Base Load Option 1 Message
Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the complete base load process begins. Press any key
to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
8-30
Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-8-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
The second choice is to load only the bootable portion of the hard drive partition, the “C” partition. This
is not an option for a new hard drive that has not been previously partitioned for proper LOGIQ™ 9
operation.
[2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is NOT lost.
NOTE:
DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON A BRAND NEW SYSTEM. IT IS INTENDED FOR
RECOVERY OF A SYSTEM THAT WILL NOT BOOT UP. APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL
NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT
DATA IS PRESERVED.
This selection will leave the remaining drive partitions intact.
Table 8-7
LOGIQ™ 9 Drive Partition and Usage
Drive Partition
Usage
C
System Files and Applications
D
User Define and Presets
E
Patient Archive Data
F
File Swap Area
Figure 8-29 Base Load Option 2 Message
Figure 8-29 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue
or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
The third choice,
[3] Exit to the A:\ prompt. Is intended for manufacturing use only.
This is NOT an option as it is intended for manufacturing use only.
If you select Option 3 by mistake, power off the system. Hold down the On / Off switch until the light
turns amber then turn the system back on.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-31
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-8-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1 or Option 2, you will see a screen showing Norton
Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion
(Approximately 8-10 mins).
7.) When prompted, remove Disk 1 from the CDROM/DVD drive. Insert Disk 2 and press Enter to
continue.
NOTE:
There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.
A message, as shown in Figure 8-30, will be displayed when the process is complete.
Figure 8-30 Base Load Complete
8.) Remove the disk from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE:
Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System
Software Load process when the system boots up.
9.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.
10.)When the system reboots it will automatically log on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process and should be allowed to run to completion.
NOTE:
While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen.
At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings
Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately
3-4 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
NOTE:
Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this
process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
11.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select Yes.
The system will come up and map the drives, then the system will reboot again automatically. After the
second reboot, the system will come up into the Windows mode.
12.)If the customer has a USB (Digital Printer) to be installed, plug it in now. The system is still in
Windows mode and should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver.
NOTE:
If the printer is installed while in application mode, excessive CPU time will be consumed and
the system will become very slow to unusable. Shutting down and rebooting will clear the
condition. The printer will function correctly.
13.)Proceed to Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44.
8-32
Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-9
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system.
This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 systems (as well as systems upgraded to BT04),
software version R4.x.x.
NOTE:
Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.
NOTE:
After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight
Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab
-> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.
NOTE:
Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
NOTE:
Be sure all USB devices are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a
printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to
Windows to install it.
NOTE:
If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.
1.) Turn on the scanner.
2.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back
to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.
3.) Perform a Backup from the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page. You need to backup the
Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, Voice Training, and Service settings.
You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.
4.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.
WARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner
5.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE:
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-33
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
6.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select
Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.
Figure 8-31 Shutdown Dialog Box
NOTE:
If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.
7.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.
8.) Turn on the scanner. A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure
8-32 on page 8-34 .
Figure 8-32 Base Load Warning Message
Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.
9.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.
8-34
Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
Figure 8-33 Base Load Option Screen
10.)Select [1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.
NOTE:
YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS
COMPLETED.
WARNING ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!
Figure 8-34 Base Load Option 1 Message
11.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to
continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-35
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure
8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion
(Approximately 8-10 minutes).
Figure 8-35 Norton Ghost screen.
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30, is displayed when the process has completed.
If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully completed. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system.
Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software”
load procedure.
Figure 8-36 Base Load Complete
12.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE:
If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the
system boots up.
13.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.
8-36
Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-9
NOTE:
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button.
14.)When the system reboots it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process and should be allowed to run to completion.
NOTE:
Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this
process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
NOTE:
While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At
times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings
Change”dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately
1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
15.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).
Figure 8-37 Restart Windows Message
16.)You now need to run the Firmware executable to update the DVD/CD-ROM drives.
a.) Determine the type of drive this LOGIQ 9 supports by right clicking on My Computer (left Set
key) --> Manage (right Set key) --> Device Manager --> DVD/CD-ROM drives. Note the type
of device.
NOTE:
If the device on the LOGIQ 9 does not match any of the Firmware directories in the next
step, then you do not need to run this update.
b.) Go to the c:\Hardware_Drivers\Firmware\ directory (you can use Windows Explorer for this).
Select the directory that matches the device supported by this LOGIQ 9 system from the
previous step.
c.) Run the executable for the DVD drive. Follow the directions in this executable (the instructions
vary by device).
17.)If necessary, remap the DVD drive. The DVD drive should be drive G. Remap the drives by running
remap.bat in c:\remap.
18.)Check your Service Dongle. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights
up. You can then remove the Service Dongle.
19.)Proceed to Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-37
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-10
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
Save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after completed.
WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,
YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO CD, DVD OR
HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system.
This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT07 and later systems with software version of R7.x.x
and later.
NOTE:
Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.
NOTE:
After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight
Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab
-> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.
NOTE:
R7.x and later Base Image and Application software disables the following: the Run window
normally accessed from Start->Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.
NOTE:
Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
NOTE:
Be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash
devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to
go back to Windows to install it.
NOTE:
If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.
1.) Turn on the scanner.
2.) Turn on all digital peripherals, including the DVR.
3.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back
to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.
4.) Record the system’s installed Option strings from the Utility --> Admin --> System Admin page.
5.) Perform a Backup from the Utility-->System-->Backup/Restore page. You should back up the
Patient Archive, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration, Voice training, and Service settings.
You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.
6.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.
7.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image”, into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE:
8-38
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.
Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-10
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
8.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select
Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.
Figure 8-38 Shutdown Dialog Box
NOTE:
If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.
9.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.
10.)Turn on the scanner.
A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-39 on page 8-39 .
Figure 8-39 Base Load Warning Message
Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.
11.)Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-39
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-10
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
Figure 8-40 Base Load Option Screen
12.)Select either option:
a.) [1] Load the complete disk -- All existing data will be lost. Or,
b.) [2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is not lost.
NOTE:
YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS
COMPLETED.
You are about to reload only the C: partition. If you DO NOT want
to do this, remove the CDROM from the CDROM drive and Press “CTRL-C”
now to exit and power cycle your system to restart without
overwriting your disk drive's current contents.
Press any key to continue...
Figure 8-41 Base Load Option 2 Message
13.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to
continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
8-40
Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-10
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
Once you have chosen to continue with the selected option, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost
(see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to
completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).
Figure 8-42 Norton Ghost screen.
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30 is displayed when the process has completed.
If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System
Software Load Image” process has successfully completed. You will
now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system.
Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system
and then continue with the “Application Software” load procedure.
Thank you!
Figure 8-43 Base Load Complete
NOTICE Do NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet.
Do NOT insert the application disc into the CD-ROM/DVD drive until you have completed all the
remaining directions in this section. If you insert any media in the drive beforehand, the drives will not
remap correctly.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-41
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-10
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
14.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE:
If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the
system boots up.
15.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.
When the system reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process.
16.)Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.
NOTE:
If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button (button turns
amber).
NOTE:
Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this
process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
NOTE:
While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At
times it may look like the system is unresponsive.
Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer
now?” to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
17.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).
Figure 8-44 System Settings Change dialog box - Restart Windows Message
After restart, the DriveUpdater dialog box and an Instructions dialog box open.
Figure 8-45 DriveUpdater (left) and Instructions Dialog Boxes
8-42
Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-10
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
Figure 8-46 DriveUpdater Dialog Box
18.)If the Current Version matches the New Version, proceed to step 20.
NOTE:
If completing step 19, you must complete all substeps associated with the DriveUpdater dialog
box BEFORE you select OK on the Instructions dialog box.
If you select the OK button on the Instructions dialog box prematurely, the system may not
remap the drives correctly.
19.)If the Current Version does not match the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:
a.) Select the Update button.
After firmware update is complete, the Update button changes to a Reboot button.
b.) Select the Reboot button.
c.) Wait for Windows to finish installing the new Driver for the upgraded firmware and to find new
hardware.
After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again.
Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box
at this time.
d.) Wait for the System Settings Change dialog box to open asking “Do you want to restart you
computer now?” (Figure 8-44).
Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box.
NOTE:
If the 'Do you want to restart your computer now?' dialog box does not open after several
minutes, select Start -> Restart to reboot and continue with step f.
e.) Select Yes to restart.
f.) Wait for the system to reboot.
After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again.
20.)If the Current Version matches the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:
a.) Select the Exit button on DriveUpdater dialog box first.
b.) Select OK in the Instructions dialog box.
At this point, the CD drive re-mapping occurs. Do not reboot the system until the
re-mapping is complete. After re-mapping, the CD/DVD drive should be drive G:\.
When the re-mapping process is complete, the re-mapping window closes.
c.) Confirm the CD\DVD drive is mapped to G:\.
21.)Proceed to 8-12-2 "Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x" on page
8-54 before loading application software R7.x.x and later.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-43
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-11
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-11-1
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
NOTE:
If you have not done so previously, double-click on the My Computer icon. Check for the drive
letters assignments of the Removable Drive (MOD) and the CD-ROM/DVD Drive. If the
CD-ROM/DVD Drive is not drive “g” and the MOD drive “h” , manually remap the drives.
NOTE:
When installing R2.1.1 software you may see error messages about not being able to replace
the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that
are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.
NOTE:
Starting with the Application S/W R3.0.0C and above, you may get a notification that the service
platform is out of date. One of the last steps in the software load is to check the service platform
version. If the version is not correct, the screen will turn yellow and you will get a pop-up
notifying you that you must reghost the C drive and reinstall software to get the latest service
software. If you do not do this service may not work.
1.) Place the “Application Software” CD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE:
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.
2.) Wait about 15 seconds.
A window will pop-up showing you the contents of the drive.
3.) Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
4.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute, perform steps a. and b. below.
a.) Select the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select “Run…”.
b.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.
Figure 8-47 Run Load Software
5.) After the screen opens to warn you that you are about to load software, press the Enter key or select
OK to start the process.
A Command (CMD) window opens, similar to the one shown in Figure 8-48.
8-44
Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
Figure 8-48
Command Window
6.) As indicated, press any key to continue.
The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. Software
provides the message in Figure 8-49.
At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
Figure 8-49 R2.1.1 Software Message
NOTE:
When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window will
disappear automatically.
7.) In BEP 3.x systems only, the system will reboot before installing the Service Platform. You will see
the Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-45
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
Figure 8-50 BEP 3 Only - System Shutdown Warning Message
After the system reboots, a DOS box displays showing you the installation of the Service Platform.
When the process is complete, another dialog box displays telling you that the system is rebooting.
It is similar to Figure 8-50, but the message will be: “Computer is being rebooted to complete
installation”
NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading
turned off. If hyper threading is turned off the system will respond slower than expected.
NOTE:
After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error
messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present,
these messages are normal and should be ignored.
8.) In BEP 2.x systems only, when the process is complete, the window will turn dark red and display
the following message in Figure 8-51, and the system will reboot.
Figure 8-51 Software Load Complete
9.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive.
If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software.
If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-52 opens. The ME2.0 will
change to reflect the currently installed software.
8-46
Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
Figure 8-52 Start Software
10.)Remove the Applications CD.
11.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.
12.)Select Cancel.
Figure 8-53 Enter Option String
13.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.
NOTE:
Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for
the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo
option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-47
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
14.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below
.
Table 8-8
8-48
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-11.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-12
Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
8-12-1
Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x
1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE:
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.
2.) Wait about 30 seconds. A window pops up (see Figure 8-54) showing you the contents of the
drive. Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
Figure 8-54 LoadSoftware.bat File
3.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute then perform steps A and B below.
A.) Select the START button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select
“Run…”.
B.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.
Figure 8-55 Run Load Software
4.) You see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software. Press the Enter key or
select OK to start the process.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-49
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
5.) You see a window open similar to the example shown in Figure 8-48.
Figure 8-56
Command Window
6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides
you with messages as to its status. R6.0.4 Software provides the message in Figure 8-56.
Please wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
Figure 8-57 R6.X.X Software Message
NOTE:
8-50
When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window
disappears automatically.
Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
7.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-50 dialog
briefly just before the system reboots.
Figure 8-58 BEP 3 Only System Shutdown Warning Message
After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform.
When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting.
It is similar to Figure 8-58 but the message will be: Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”
NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading
turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.
NOTE:
After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error
messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present,
these messages are normal and should be ignored.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-51
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
8.) When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.
You get a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-59. (Version “R6.0.3B” in the illustration below is
an example. The actual application software version will be reflected.)
Figure 8-59 Start Software
9.) REMOVE the Applications CD.
10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START (if the CD is still in the tray; otherwise,
the system starts up automatically).
NOTE:
If the service dongle is still plugged in, you will see the Service Login instead (see Figure 8-60).
Figure 8-60 Service Login
8-52
Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window opens.
Figure 8-61 Enter Option String
11.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.
NOTE:
Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for
the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo
option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
NOTE:
If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not
troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding
is essential to proper system function and optimization.
12.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided
below.
Table 8-1
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-12.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-53
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-12-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x
If the customer had the Wired VoiceScan option on their system, the following procedure needs to be
done to change the audio output from the wired headset to the PC Speakers. This procedure only needs
to be performed after a reghost of the system.
NOTE:
This procedure is not required for Wireless VoiceScan.
1.) Plug the wired headset into the USB ports on the left side of the upper control panel.
NOTE:
After the system is turned on, the operating system assigns the headset as the new preferred
playback/recording device. The following steps reassign the preferred playback device.
2.) Select Start->Settings->Control Panel->Sounds and Audio Devices to bring up the Sounds and
Audio Devices properties box.
Figure 8-62 Path to Sounds and Audio Devices<$elemtextonly
8-54
Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-12-2 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x (cont’d)
3.) Select the Audio tab.
Figure 8-63 Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Box
4.) In the Sound Playback area, select “SoundMAX Digital Audio” as the Default device, press Apply
then OK.
NOTE:
The recording device should remain “Plantronics Headset”.
The system sounds should now be directed to the PC Speaker.
Complete the appropriate application load.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-55
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-13
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
If you have previously performed a Base Image Software Load, proceed to section 8-23-1, Step 1.
If you are only loading the Application Software, insert the application CD into the CD/DVD drive and
power cycle the system. At boot-up, the system shows the “Start Application” dialog box. Click on [Install
SW] and proceed with section 8-23-1, Step 6.
8-13-1
Loading Applications Software
1.) Confirm drive letter for CD\DVD is mapped to G:\. If the CD\DVD drive is not mapped to the
G:\ drive:
A.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer”.
B.) Open C:\remap.
C.) Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.
2.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM/DVD drive.
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.
3.) Wait about 30 seconds.
A window pops up (see Figure 8-64) showing you the contents of the drive.
4.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
Figure 8-64 LoadSoftware.bat File
5.) If the pop-up window in Figure 8-64 does not open in a minute, perform steps A - C below.
A.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer”.
B.) Double-click the G:\ drive to open the pop-up window in Figure 8-64.
C.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
NOTE:
8-56
If the base image does not match the part number and revision of the approved base image,
then the system notifies you of the required base image needed and does not run the software.
Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-13
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
6.) A window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-65 opens.
Figure 8-65
Command Window (Note: Application software for release R9.X L9)
7.) As indicated, press any key to continue.
The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R9.X
Software provides the message in Figure 8-66.
8.) Wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
Figure 8-66 R9.X.X and later Software Message
NOTE:
When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window
disappears automatically.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-57
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-13
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
9.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-67 dialog
briefly just before the system reboots.
Figure 8-67 BEP 3.x and later System Shutdown Warning Message
After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform.
When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting.
It is similar to Figure 8-50 but the message will be: “Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”
NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading
turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.
If hyper threading turns off, you must perform the c: partition reghost and application s/w load again.
NOTE:
8-58
After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error
messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present,
these messages are normal and should be ignored.
Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-13
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
10.)When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.
A dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-68 opens.
(Version “R6.0.3B” in the illustration below is an example. The actual application software
version will be reflected as R9.X.)
Figure 8-68 Start Software
11.)REMOVE the Applications CD.
If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window
opens.
Figure 8-69 Enter Option String
12.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-59
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 8-13
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
NOTE:
Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for
the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo
option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
NOTE:
If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not
troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding
is essential to proper system function and optimization. For information on updating VPD, see
Proprietary Service Manual (2294854-100), Chapter 8, Verify and Update Vital Product Data.
8-13-2
Functional Checkout
Run functional checkout to ensure system operation.
1.) Connect each probe to ensure that it is recognized by the system.
2.) Check every probe in every mode.
3.) Reconnect to the network.
4.) Verify Software level on the Utility --> System --> About menu; also confirm the Base Image Load
and Patch CD information on this screen.
5.) Check Date, Time, and Timezone.
6.) Restore (type in) the TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway, Network Speed) on the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP menu. Save these settings and
reboot the system.
7.) Verify the Presets loaded properly. The patient data should have transferred since the upgrade only
entails a C: Partition load.
If the transfer failed, perform a Restore via Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore. Select to restore
Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, and Service settings. The system
automatically reboots.
8.) Perform audio test.
9.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper CD/DVD write functionality.
10.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-1
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-13.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
11.)Perform basic system measurements.
12.)Replace old Base Load and Application Software CDs and Documentation.
8-60
Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-14
Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
8-14-1
NOTE:
Application Software Upgrade Procedure
When installing software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the
following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are
being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.
WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,
YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A MOD, CD,
DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.
1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.
2.) Power Down the scanner.
3.) Power up the scanner. Wait for a dialog box like the one in Figure 8-70.
Figure 8-70 Start Application Window
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-61
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)
4.) Select Install SW ... .
5.) Two separate dialog boxes open warning you that you are about to install new software as shown
in Figure 8-71. In both cases, click OK.
Figure 8-71 StartLoader Dialog Boxes
Figure 8-72
Command Window (R2.x shown)
6.) Another window will be displayed asking you to “Press any key to continue…”.
8-62
Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)
7.) As indicated, press any key to continue.
The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.0
Software provides the message in Figure 8-73.
Figure 8-73 R2.1.0 Software Message
At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 10 minutes).
When the process is complete, the window will turn dark red, display the message in Figure 8-74, and
the system will reboot.
Figure 8-74 Software Load Complete
8.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive.
If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software.
If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-75 opens.
Figure 8-75 Start Software
9.) Remove the Applications CD.
10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.
11.)Select Cancel.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-63
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)
Figure 8-76 Enter Option String
12.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.
NOTE:
Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for
the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option
string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
8-14-2
Functional Checkout
1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-2
8-64
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-14.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-15
System Setup
8-15-1
To Complete the System Setup
1.) From the Touch Screen on the scanner, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCPIP Tab.
2.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually.
3.) Input the DICOM information.
-
This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital
network. If it is not correct, input the correct data.
4.) After all information is entered, select Save Settings.
5.) Complete the InSite Checkout again. Refer to the InSite/iLinq and InSite ExC Installation Manual,
2354611-100, Rev 4 or later.
8-15-2
VCR Setup
1.) Reset the VCR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals.
2.) Under VCR, select Sony SVO-9500 VCR or Mitsubishi MD 3000, as appropriate, and SAVE.
3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.
4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.
8-15-3
DVR Setup
1.) Reset the DVR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals.
2.) Under VCR, select Panasonic DVR and Save.
3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.
4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.
8-15-4
Printer Setup
1.) If the customer has a USB (Digital) Printer and it was plugged in at the time the Base Image
Software was installed, it should have been recognized and automatically installed.
2.) If you did not install the printer until after the Applications software was loaded, you will need a
service key (dongle) to open Windows. Follow the manual setup procedures in the LOGIQ™ 9
Peripheral Installation Manual 2341053-100.
3.) For the UP-D895 Printer, you must manually set the resolution to 1920 x 1280 whenever software
is reloaded see 3-14-1 "Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)" on page 3-24.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-65
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-15-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Print Key Assignment and Checkout
Because of the addition of more printer choices, digital and analog, the factory default print key
configuration has been removed for the color and b/w printers.
1.) Determine which printers are configured on the system.
The former factory defaults were Color = P3 and B/W = P2.
2.) Consult the customer to ensure which “Print” keys (P1-4) should be assigned to printers.
3.) Select Utility -> Admin -> Connectivity -> Buttons. Choose the desired print button. Under
“Destinations”, select necessary printer choice from the drop-down list.
4.) Press the print key just configured.
The screenshot prints to the destination printer.
8-15-6
Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets
1.) Place the Backup/Restore media (MOD or CD-R) in the drive.
2.) Select the Utility tab on the Touch Panel. Select System, then Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore screen opens.
Figure 8-77 Backup / Restore Screen
NOTE:
8-66
If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on
with administrator privileges.
Section 8-15 - System Setup
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets (cont’d)
3.) In the Restore list, select from the following, depending on which configurations you want to restore:
-
Patient Archive
-
Report Archive
-
User Defined Configuration
-
Service (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)
OR, in the Detailed Restore section select one of the following:
NOTE:
-
Imaging Presets
-
Connectivity Configuration
-
Measurement Configuration
-
Comment/Body Pattern Configuration
-
Voice Scan Training Profiles
-
Report Templates
-
3D/4D (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)
-
Fast Key (R7.x.x or Later)
-
Custom Programs (R9.x.x)
-
All Others
Only restore the Service presets onto the system from which they were backed up. Do not carry
Service presets from one system to another.
4.) In the Media field, select the media that the backup is on.
5.) Select Restore.
The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the
System/Backup/Restore screen.
NOTE:
8-15-7
If you restore Service there is another progress bar that comes up during restore. When you do
a restore, the system will automatically reboot. This only occurs after the boot where you restore
Service. After this progress bar goes away the system will load normally. The progress bar will
complete several full passes. This is normal.
Cycle System Power
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
Figure 8-78 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down
2.) Power up the system for functional check-out.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-67
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-15-8
8-15-8-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Standby Operation Checkout
To Place the System in the Standby Mode
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.
2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.
The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.
3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power
cable or switching off the breaker.
The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:
NOTE:
-
If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power ON/OFF button blinks.
-
If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15
seconds.
Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch blinks while the system is in Standby Mode. Because
of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.
4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall.
The system beeps.
NOTE:
DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged. This will turn the system off.
5.) Plug the system back in within 15 minutes.
If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system
shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.
NOTE:
It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is
six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the
ON position.
NOTE:
If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in
the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not
boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the
ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use
standby during this time.
See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.
8-15-8-2
To Wake the System from Standby Mode
1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than .25 seconds.
The system becomes functional after about 45 seconds.
NOTE:
If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of
Standby Mode.
NOTE:
Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.
NOTE:
Charge time for batteries is approximately 10 hours. Expected battery lifetime for frequent
standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit
breaker in the ON position.
8-68
Section 8-15 - System Setup
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-15-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Functional Checkout
1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-3
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-15.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
2.) Reboot the system.
3.) If the system does not recognize the video card, perform a C: partition base load
(see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26, Section 8-9
"Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image
Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38).
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-69
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-16
Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-16-1
Manpower
One person, 1 hour
8-16-2
Tools
Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm
Phillips screwdriver size 2
Socket 8 mm
8-16-3
Preparations
1.) Shut down the system .
2.) Remove Operator Panel.
3.) Remove XY- Handle .
8-70
Section 8-16 - Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-16-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure
1.) Unscrew 8 (5 mm) and 2 (3 mm) hexagon screws .
2.) Take care of the spring.
3.) Remove the Console Lock Assembly.
8-16-5
Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure
1.) Install the Lock Assembly.
2.) Install the spring.
3.) Fasten the 10 hexagon screws.
4.) Install Operator Panel.
5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-4
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-5-1 or
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or
4-5-2 or
Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-16.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-71
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-17
Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-17-1
Manpower
One person, 1 hour
8-17-2
8-17-3
Tools
•
Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm
•
Phillips screwdriver size 2
•
Socket 8 mm
Preparations
1.) Shut down the system .
2.) Remove Operator Panel .
3.) Remove XY- Handle .
Strap
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 8-79 Release Lock Assembly
8-17-4
Release Lock Removal Procedure
1.) Unscrew 8 mm nut behind XY-Handle.
2.) Unscrew 2 hexagon screws (3 mm).
3.) Unscrew 4 hexagon screws (2,5 mm).
4.) Remove Release Lock Assembly.
8-72
Section 8-17 - Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-17-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Release Lock Installation Procedure
1.) Install Release Lock Assembly.
2.) Fasten 6 hexagon screws.
3.) Fasten nut behind XY- Handle.
4.) Install XY-Handle .
5.) Install Operator Panel.
Strap
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 8-80 Release Lock Assembly
6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-5
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-5-1 or
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or
4-5-2 or
Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-17.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
8-73
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-18
Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
8-18-1
Manpower
2 persons, 4 hours
WARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and
damage to the equipment.
WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are
encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
8-18-2
Tools
Large coin and a large flat screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver
Long Phillips driver
#2 Phillips screwdriver
5 mm Hexagon key
8-18-3
Overview
Replacement of the gas shock in a LOGIQ™ 9 is not a difficult task but one that should be approached
with safety in mind.
The Gas Shock is used to balance the weight from the Top Console. It is located inside the frame,
between the Front End Card Cage and the Back End Processor (BEP).
3
1
2
2
4
4
Figure 8-81 Typical Gas Shock Assembly
8-74
Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18-3 Overview (cont’d)
You get access to the Gas Shock via openings in the frame behind the BEP, so the BEP must be
removed. To reduce the weight of the Top Console, the monitor should be removed.
To release the tension in the Gas Shock, the Top Console must be secured in its upper position during
replacement.
Components must be removed to remove weight from the console and to gain access to the gas shock
attachment points. Items removed are:
-
Covers
-
Handle
-
Air Filter
-
Peripherals
-
VCR/Top Tray Frame
-
Monitor
-
Back End Processor (BEP)
Pay particular attention to all cautions and warnings in this procedure because injury could result from
improper handling of components and sharp edges on metal chassis parts.
WARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores
mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor
and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when you
activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the
shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.
8-18-4
Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.
2.) Remove the left- and/or right-side covers.
3.) Remove the upper rear cover.
4.) Remove the top cover.
5.) Remove the front cover.
6.) Remove the lower rear cover.
7.) Remove the rear handle.
8.) Remove the back-end processor
9.) Remove the monitor assembly.
10.)Remove the color video printer.
11.)Remove the black and white video printer.
12.)Remove the VCR.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-75
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-18-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Top Tray Frame
The Color Printer/Top Tray Frame should be remove to avoid damage to this part.
Top Tray Frame
Figure 8-82 Color Printer/Top Tray Frame
8-18-5-1
Removal Procedure
1.) Remove the four screws securing the frame to the chassis.
Figure 8-83 Remove Four Screws
2.) Remove the frame and set it aside.
8-76
Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-18-5-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Removal Procedure (cont’d)
You should now have a chassis with all the necessary parts removed as shown in Figure
8-84 on page 8-77 .
Figure 8-84 Chassis with Necessary Parts Removed
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-77
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-18-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Gas Shock Removal
The stripped down system console will be tilted on its side in order to remove and replace the gas shock.
1.) Set the back brake on the Right Side of the console. The right side is the side with the Front End
Processor.
2.) Ensure that the keyboard X/Y motion (“Frogleg”) is locked.
3.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.
WARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and
damage to the equipment.
4.) Place some padded material on the floor next to the right side of the chassis.
5.) Refer to Figure 8-85, with one person at the back of the chassis and one at the keyboard handles
in the front, carefully tilt the console and lay it on its right side.
Figure 8-85 Tilting the Console
6.) You should now have access to the top and bottom shock mounts as shown in Figure 8-86.
8-78
Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d)
Bottom Shock Mount
Top Shock Mount
Figure 8-86 Console on its Side
WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are
encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
7.) At the top of the shock mount there is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Using 2 slotted
screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp. Refer to Figure 8-87.
8.) At the top shock mount remove the:
-
Top “C” (Circlip) Clip
-
Pin
-
Bushings
Slide out the top shock end.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-79
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d)
Wire end lock
Release arm
Spring
Gas Spring Axle
Circlip
Plastic strap
Figure 8-87 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism
9.) At the shock bottom mounting point, remove the Circlip. Refer to Figure 8-88.
10.)Remove the mounting axel and the washers. Refer to Figure 8-88.
NOTE:
Take care, not to loose clips or washers.
11.)Lift up the bottom of the shock and pull it out and away from the pin.
Mounting Axel,
Circlip and
washers
Figure 8-88 Bottom Shock Mount
8-80
Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-18-7
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Install the New Gas Shock
Reverse the removal procedure to install the new gas shock.
Figure 8-89 New Gas Shock as delivered
The shock comes pre-loaded with a “stop block” tywrapped to the top of the shock to prevent accidental
complete extension of the shock. Refer to Figure 8-90. The Position of the release arm is also
preadjusted.
Figure 8-90 New Shock with Stop Block
1.) Slide the bottom of the shock into the bottom mount position as shown in Figure 8-91.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-81
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d)
Mounting Pin
“C” Clip
Figure 8-91 Shock Bottom Mounted
2.) Place a washer on each side of the bottom of the shock mount and align the holes as shown in
Figure 8-91.
NOTE:
You can use the top mounting pin to help align the bottom of the shock mount with the washers.
3.) Reach behind the bottom of the shock mount and lift the bottom mounting pin so that it slides
through the washer, shock, washer and bottom mounting bracket as shown in Figure 8-91.
4.) Install the “C” clip to secure the bottom of the shock mount as shown in Figure 8-91.
5.) Move the top of the shock mount into position as shown in Figure 8-92.
6.) Assemble the top of the shock to the chassis using the pin, two washers and “C” clips as shown in
Figure 8-92.
Mounting Pin
“C” Clip
Tywrap
Stop Block
Figure 8-92 Top of Shock mounted
8-82
Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d)
WARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and
damage to the equipment.
7.) Using two people, return the console to its upright position (sitting on all four wheels).
8.) Release the shock by cutting the tywrap and removing the stop block as shown in Figure 8-92.
8-18-8
Reassemble Z-Release
1.) Place the Release Cable Socket in the slot on the Shock top’s lower flange as shown in Figure 8-93.
Slot in Shock top’s Lower
Flange
Release Cable Socket
Figure 8-93 Mounting the Release Cable
2.) Tywrap the Release Cable Socket to the Shock head as shown in Figure 8-94.
Tywrap
Figure 8-94 Tywrapped Release Cable
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-83
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d)
3.) Thread the spring and barrel clamp(s) onto the Release Cable wire. Place the Barrel Clamp(s) in
the Clamp cradle on the Shock’s Valve Release arm as shown in Figure 8-95.
Cable wire End
Barrel Clamps
Release Arm in Upper
Position
Spring
Figure 8-95 Cradled Barrel Clamps
4.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the wire end shown in Figure 8-95 above the clamp(s) and pull it
upward to take up any cable slack.
5.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp(s) downwards until it rests in the Shock
Valve Release Arm Clamp Cradle as shown in Figure 8-95.
WARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the Cradle. If one of the tines should
break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced AGAIN.
6.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two
screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.
7.) Without squeezing the Top Console Release Lever, check that the Shock Valve Release Arm is in
its uppermost position as shown in Figure 8-95.
8.) Squeeze the Top Console Release Lever and watch the clamp cradle move down immediately as
the lever is squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be
taken up (or slackened) with the Top Console cable adjustment screw.
NOTE:
Before installing the Back End Processor, check all connections to the AC Transformer box to
ensure they were not disturbed while replacing the gas shock.
9.) Replace the BEP. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.
10.)Replace the Monitor. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.
11.)You should now be able to power up the system and check basic operation prior to installing the
peripherals and covers. If the system functions normally, continue reassembling the system.
12.)After completing a basic check out, power down the system.
13.)Replace the Color Printer/Top Tray frame.
14.)Replace the VCR.
15.)Replace the B/W.
16.)Replace the Color Printer.
8-84
Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d)
17.)Replace all covers.
-
Air Filter
-
Handle
-
Top Cover
-
Back Covers (Top & Bottom)
-
Front Cover
-
Filter Cover
-
Side Covers
18.)Power up the system and do a complete functional check of all peripherals.
19.)Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below
Table 8-6
Functional Tests
Service
Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-3
Standby Mode
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
Section 4-4
Peripheral Checks
4-5-1 or
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or
4-5-2 or
Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
4-5-4
Brakes and Direction Locks Checks
Section 6-3
Monitor
10-7-4
Grounding Continuity
10-7-5
Chassis Leakage Current Test
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-18.
Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and
meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
tests and is ready for use. “
20.)Check the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation). Readjust if necessary.
Refer to Section 6-5 "Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment" on page 6-8.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-85
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-19
Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
The Gas Spring Wirecable (FB307375) is a field replaceable unit. The wirecable is used when operating
the Z-Release Handle to move the Top Console up/down.
8-19-1
Manpower
1 person, 1-2 hours
8-19-2
8-19-3
Tools
•
Narrow standard screwdriver
•
Needle nose pliers
•
4mm allen wrench
•
Hexagon key 3mm (covers)
•
Phillips screwdriver (covers)
•
Coin and large screwdriver (covers)
Wirecable Removal Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system as shown in .
NOTICE
Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed
Date
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the breaker.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
4. Wait at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized
even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
2.) Remove the Side Covers .
3.) Remove the Front Cover .
Removing the Front Cover allows you easier access to raise the column cover as necessary.
4.) Remove B/W Video Printer .
8-86
Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations (cont’d)
5.) Remove VCR or DVR.
Removing B/W Video Printer and VCR/DVR gives access to the lower end of wirecable and the
release mechanism located behind and between the rear parts of these two units.
Disconnect Cables
B/W Printer
VCR
Figure 8-96 Disconnect and Remove the Printer and VCR or DVR
6.) Remove upper op panel and lower op panels.
7.) Lift console to top position.
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-87
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-19-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Wirecable Removal Procedure
1.) Remove Z-handle shown in Figure 8-97.
c.) Unscrew 1 hexagon screw.
d.) Release the wire-end lock from the handle.
e.) Remove the handle.
Hexagon Screw
Wire-end lock
Z-Handle
Figure 8-97 Z-Release handle, view from below
2.) Cut plastic strap shown in Figure 8-98.
3.) Unscrew both upper and lower wire-end locks shown in Figure 8-98. Take care of spring.
Upper wire-end lock
Lower wire-end lock
Release arm
Wirecable
Arm fork
Console Cable Assembly
Spring
Gas Spring Axle
Circlip
Mantle end - lower
Plastic strap
Figure 8-98 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism
8-88
Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure (cont’d)
4.) Pull the wirecable out of mantle (black rubber tube housing) from the upper end of the mantle shown
in Figure 8-99.
Mantle end - upper
Figure 8-99 Z-Release handle, view from above
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-89
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
8-19-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Wirecable Installation Procedure
1.) Thread the new wirecable with prefixed wire-end lock through Z-Handle.
2.) Thread wirecable from Z-Handle down through the upper mantle (Figure 8-99) until the wirecable
is visible through the lower mantle end (Figure 8-98).
3.) Reinstall Z-handle.
4.) Thread the cone-shaped spring on the lower end of the wirecable.
5.) Put two wire-end locks on wirecable and hook wire-end into the release arm fork. See Figure 8-87.
6.) Secure wirecable with a new plastic strap. See Figure 8-87.
7.) Loosen the lower wire-end lock. See Figure 8-87.
8.) Use the needle nose pliers to pull the lower end of the wirecable upwards and to push the loose
wire-end lock against the release arm fork.
While maintaining tension on the wirecable using the needle nose pliers in one hand (so that the
Z-handle is tight and in proper position, Figure 8-100), use a flathead screwdriver in the other hand
to fasten the loose lower wire-end lock.
9.) Loosen the upper lock, push it against the lower, and fasten the upper wire-end lock.
10.)Confirm the Z-handle is in proper position (Figure 8-100).
NOTE:
When the wirecable is tight, the Z-handle will be in proper position. Improper Z-handle position
will affect the performance of the gas shock.
Z-Handle
Figure 8-100 Z-Release handle in proper position, view from above
11.)Perform a functional test of the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation) before
cutting off overshooting lower wire-end. Readjust if necessary (see “Z-Release Cable and Gas
Spring Adjustment” in Chapter 6 of the Service Manual).
12.)Reinstall the upper and lower operator panels.
13.)Reinstall VCR or DVR.
14.)Reinstall B/W-Video Printer.
15.)Reinstall Front Cover.
16.)Reinstall Side Covers.
8-90
Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure (cont’d)
17.)Perform the following functional tests. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-7
Functional Tests
Service
Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
Debrief Script
4-5-2 or
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-19.
Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
tests and is ready for use. “
Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
4-5-4
Brakes and Direction Locks Checks
7-6-1-1
Calibration Utilities
Section 7-7
I/O Devices
10-7-4
Grounding Continuity
10-7-5
Chassis Leakage Current Test
Section 4-4
4-5-1 or
Peripheral Checks
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-91
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 8-20
Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
8-20-1
Manpower
Two persons, .5 hour + travel
8-20-2
Tools
Hexagon keys, 5mm and 6 mm
8-20-3
Kit Contents
Table 8-1 Shim Kit - LOGIQ™ 9 or Vivid 7 Op Panel (5116529)
8-20-4
Qty
Description
2
Shim Washer .635 mm thick
1
Shim Washer 1mm thick
Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.
2.) Remove the monitor.
8-20-5
Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure
1.) Return the console to the locked position and engage the X-Y Lock.
2.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.
8-92
Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Have one person hold on to the rear of the operator panel. See Figure 8-101 on page 8-93 .
Figure 8-101 Hold on to Rear of Operator Console
NOTICE Lock Tight is applied to the hex screws that attach the Operator Console to the Frogleg during
assembly. Be sure to seat the Hexagon Key firmly in the screw before attempting to unscrew so that
you don’t strip the screw head.
Socket Head Cap
Screw requiring 6
mm hexagon key
Button Head
Screws requiring 5
mm hexagon key
Button Head Screws
requiring 5 mm
hexagon key
Figure 8-102 Screws through Frogleg to Top Console
4.) Unscrew and remove socket head cap screw from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93
and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .
5.) Unscrew and remove four button head screws from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93
and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-93
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)
Figure 8-103 Remove Screws
6.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip it back. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
1 mm thick washer goes on rear
hole (Socket head cap screw)
.635 mm thick washers
go on middle holes
.635 mm thick washers
go on middle holes
no shims on front holes
Figure 8-104 Place Washers (shims) on Frogleg
7.) Place 1 mm thick washer between Frogleg and Top Console so the socket head cap screw can be
inserted through it. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
8.) Place the two .635 mm thick washers between the Frogleg and Top Console assembly so the
middle button head screws can be inserted through them. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
8-94
Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)
9.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip console back into place.
10.)Install socket head cap screw using care not to cross thread the casting.
11.)Install all button head screws, using care not to cross thread the casting.
12.)Tighten all five screws.
13.)Replace the monitor.
8-20-6
Functional Check
1.) Close Frog Leg.
2.) Verify “Crash Arms” extend at least 1/2 way down “Crash Pads”. See Figure 8-105 on page 8-95
and Figure 8-106 on page 8-96 .
Crash Arms
Figure 8-105 Crash Arm
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-95
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d)
Thumbnail indicates 1/2 way
down Crash Pad
Figure 8-106 Crash Pad
3.) Lock and Unlock Frogleg to verify correct operation.
NOTE:
If frogleg continues to rub on operator panel after the shims have been put in place, or if crash
arms do not extend at least 1/2 way down the crash pads, you will need to order a new frogleg.
4.) Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.
8-96
Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d)
Table 8-8
Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section
Functional Test / Diagnostic Test
4-2-2
Power On / Boot Up
4-2-4
Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5
Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8
System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9
System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10
Basic Measurements
4-5-1 or
4-5-2 or
4-5-3
Debrief Script
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-20.
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or Leakage Current measured at (record the value)
and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or
required tests and is ready for use. “
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
Section 6-3
Monitor
7-6-1-1
Calibration Utilities
Section 7-7
I/O Devices
10-7-4
Grounding Continuity
10-7-5
Chassis Leakage Current Test
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures
8-97
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
This page was intentionally left blank.
8-98
Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
Section 9-1
Overview
9-1-1
Purpose of Chapter 9
This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the LOGIQ™ 9.
Table 9-1
Contents in Chapter 9
Section
Description
Page Number
9-1
Overview
9-1
9-2
List of Abbreviations
9-3
9-3
Console View
9-4
9-4
External Covers
9-5
9-5
Additional Console Hardware
9-7
9-6
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
9-9
9-7
Operator Control Panel Brackets
9-13
9-8
Gas Spring
9-14
9-9
Monitor Assembly
9-16
9-10
Operator Control Panel Assembly
9-20
9-11
Front End Processor Assembly
9-26
9-12
I/O Interfaces
9-32
9-13
3-D Externals
9-34
9-14
Back End Processor Assemblies
9-35
9-15
Software
9-41
9-16
Interconnect Cables
9-44
9-17
Power Distribution Modules
9-61
9-18
Air Distribution
9-62
9-19
Voice Scan
9-63
9-20
4D Components
9-66
9-21
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components
9-67
9-22
Peripherals
9-68
9-23
Customer Documentation
9-69
9-24
Probes
9-70
Chapter 9
9-1
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-1-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers
Table 9-2
LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations
Part Number
Description
2188900
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-4
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-5
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-6
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0
2351100
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2375600
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2404587
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
5150000
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-2
LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-3
LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5177000
LOGIQ™ 9 120-60V Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*
5177000-2
LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V PAL Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 +
BT09*
5177000-3
LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V NTSC Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 +
BT09*
*BT09 is a software-only upgrade
Special Service Tool: service key/dongle (p/n 066E0703) required for some GE proprietary operations.
9-2
Section 9-1 - Overview
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/22/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-2
List of Abbreviations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Assy - Assembly
BEP - Back End Processor
CRU - Customer Replacement Unit
Ctrl - Control
FEP - Front End Processor
F.O.B - Flock of Birds or 3-D Option
FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub
FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved)
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
Int - Internal
I/O - Input/Output
PWA - Printed Wire Assembly
Recv - Receive
XFRMR - Transformer
Chapter 9
9-3
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-3
Console View
Left
Front
Rear
Right
Figure 9-1 Console Views
Table 9-3
Parts by Table Numbers
Part Table Name
Table Number
Part Table Name
Table Number
Table 9-20
External Covers
Table 9-4
Back End Processor Assemblies
Table 9-21
Table 9-22
Additional Console Hardware
Table 9-5
BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.x
Table 9-23
BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.x
Table 9-24
Software Tools
Table 9-25
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
Table 9-6
Peripheral Cables
Table 9-26
Table 9-27
Table 9-28
Table 9-29
Table 9-30
Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086
Table 9-7
Power Distribution
Table 9-31
Operator Panel Brackets
Table 9-8
Air Distribution Parts
Table 9-32
Gas Spring
Table 9-9
Voice Scan
Table 9-33
Monitor Assembly - Standard
Table 9-10
Wireless Interconnect
Table 9-34
Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD
Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD
Table 9-11
Table 9-12
4 D Parts
Table 9-35
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper
Table 9-14
Continuous Wave Doppler Components
Table 9-36
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower
Table 9-15
Table 9-16
Approved Peripherals
Table 9-37
Front End Processor Assembly
Table 9-17
User Documentation
Table 9-38
I/O Interfaces
Table 9-18
Available Probes
Table 9-39
3-D Externals
Table 9-19
Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix
Table 9-40
9-4
Section 9-3 - Console View
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-4
External Covers
101
107
101A
102
102A
105
105A
103
103A
106
103B
104
104A
104B
108
108A
109
110
109A
110A
111
Figure 9-2 External Covers
Chapter 9
9-5
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
External Covers (cont’d)
Table 9-4
Item
External Covers
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
101
Top Cover
FB307383
Replaced with FC307772
1
-
N
101A
Top Cover
FC307772
Replaces FB307383
1
-
1
102
Front Cover
FC307771
Cover only
1
-
1
102A
Front Cover Assembly
FC200076
with Two Labels, Apply the Appropriate Label
1
-
1
103
Right Side Cover
FC307422
Cover only
1
-
1
103A
Right Side Cover Assembly
FC200074
with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
103B
Right Side Cover Assembly
FC200422
with bumper and GE Logo. If ordering to replace
non-logo cover, also order FC200421 and replace
set
1
-
1
104
Left Side Cover
FC307773
Cover only
1
-
1
104A
Left Side Cover Assembly
FC200073
with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
104B
Left Side Cover Assembly
FC200421
with bumper and GE Logo. If ordered to replace
non-logo cover, also order FC200422 and replace
set
1
-
1
105
Rear Cover
FC307776
Cover only
1
-
1
105A
Rear Cover Assembly
FC200077
with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
106
Rear Filter Cover
FB200385
with brackets - Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
107
Footrest Bumper
FB307387
1
-
1
108
Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert
FB307990
Replaced with FC307785
1
-
N
108A
Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert
FC307785
Replaces FB307990
1
-
1
109
B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert
FB307989
Replaced with FC307784
1
-
N
109A
B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert
FC307784
Replaces FB307989
1
-
1
110
VCR Cavity Filler Insert
FB307988
Replaced with FC307783
1
-
N
110A
VCR Cavity Filler Insert
FC307783
Replaces FB307988
1
-
1
111
Filter Media
FB307903
Dust Filter - Same as Vivid 7 -
1
Y
1
9-6
Section 9-4 - External Covers
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-5
Additional Console Hardware
146
145
151 151A
152
145A
148
148A
147
147A
144
149
143
150 150A 150B
142
149A
141
142A
Figure 9-3 Additional Console Hardware
Chapter 9
9-7
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-5
Additional Console Hardware (cont’d)
Table 9-5
Item
141
142
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Additional Console Hardware
Part Name
Caster Hub Caps
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
2293008-5
Need to order 2 per caster, adhesive mounting
1
-
1
2
-
1
2
-
1
2
-
1
2293008-3
Rear Casters (wheels)
Does Not Have Pedal Activated Swivel Lock
Assembly. Manual Swivel Lock
- Same as Vivid 7 Also order FC200829
Wooden wedge and bevel edge board
rear caster replacement tools
142A
Rear Caster Replacement Tool
FC200829
143
Front Casters (wheels)
2293008-2
144
Shelf Cover
2291452
1
-
1
145
TV/TR Probe Holder Front
2291455
1
-
1
145A
TV/TR Probe Holder Rear
2299040
1
-
1
146
Pocket Shelf Mat
2291453
1
-
1
147
Under Shelf Cover
2291454
1
-
2
147A
Under Shelf Cover
2291454-2
1
-
2
148
Right Probe Holder Assembly
2299038
1
-
1
148A
Right Probe Holder Assembly - DSB
5212181
1
-
1
149
Left Probe Holder Assembly
2299039
1
-
1
149A
Left Probe Holder Assembly - DSB
5212272
BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue
1
-
1
150
Gel Warmer Assembly * see note
2291461
*Need to order GE Logo Decal 2269030-15 or
L9 Logo Decal 5255441
1
-
1
150A
GE Logo Decal for Gel Warmer
2269030-15
Must order when replacing Gel Warmer
1
-
1
150B
L9 Logo Decal for Gel Warmer
5255441
Must order when replacing Gel Warmer
1
-
1
151
Gel Warmer Power Source
2329637
12VDC Power Source - Obsolete (See FMI 70183)
1
-
N
151A
Gel Warmer Power Source
2329637-3
6VDC Power Source (BT’06 and earlier)
1
-
1
152
Gel Warmer and Subwoofer Power
Supply
5133204-6
Dual Out Power Supply & Gel Warmer
(BT’06 and later)
1
-
1
9-8
Includes Swivel Lock Assembly
- Same as Vivid 7 -
BT06 and later
BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue
Section 9-5 - Additional Console Hardware
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-6
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
173
177
170
176
171
172
175 175A
179
180
181
185
182 182A
183
183A
184
178
Figure 9-4 OP I/O Mechanical Parts
Chapter 9
9-9
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-6
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (cont’d)
Table 9-6
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
170
Top Console Upper Casting
Assembly
2331665
Assembly for Service
1
-
2
171
Top Console Lower Casting
Assembly
2331858
Assembly for Service
1
-
2
172
Frogleg (complete)
FB200340
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
2
173
Frogleg Bumper Kit
FC200086
1
-
1
175
Rear Handle Assembly
FB200406
with cable wrap hooks - Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
175A
Rear Handle Assembly - DSB
5199876
BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue
1
-
1
176
Brake Lock Pedal
FB307407
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
177
Directional Lock Pedal
FB307409
Swivel Lock Pedal
1
-
1
178
Upper Column Cover
FC307787
1
-
1
178
Lower Column Cover
FC307779
1
-
1
179
Top Console Lock Assembly
FB200350
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
2
180
Lock Release
FB200920
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
2
181
X-Y Release Handle
FB307297
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
2
182
Z-Release Handle
FB307296
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
2
182A
Z-Release Handle - DSB
5213108
BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue
1
-
2
183
Main Handle with Label
FC200131
Front Handle with Label in center
1
-
1
183A
Main Handle - DSB
5213255
BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue
1
-
1
184
Pedal Assembly
FB200595
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
185
Wire Cable, Gas Spring
FB307375
Wire used when operating vertical movement of
Top Console - Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
2
Needed on some models to keep the frogleg from
rubbing on the operator console
Kit contains two .635 mm washers and one 1mm
washer See Section 8-20 "Frog Leg Angle
Adjustment" on page 8-92
1
-
1
goes on back/top half of Frogleg arms
- Same as Vivid 7 -
Part of Kit
Column Cover Kit FC200088
186
Frogleg Shim Kit
5116529
188
Subwoofer Speaker Assembly
5133204-2
1
-
1
189
Speaker Harness
5133204-3
1
-
1
190
Speaker Grill
5133204-4
1
-
1
191
Knob
5133204-5
1
-
1
9-10
Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-6
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (Continued)
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
192
Brake mechanism - Left Connecting
Rod
FB307471
- Same as Vivid 7 threaded rod between front brake and caster.
Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper
screws as necessary
1
-
1
193
Brake mechanism - Right
Connecting Rod
FB307472
- Same as Vivid 7 threaded rod between front brake and caster
Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper
screws as necessary
1
-
1
194
Brake mechanism - Parking Brake
Pedal screws
080X0612
- Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism
1
-
1
195
Brake mechanism - Front Bumper
screws
080X0612
- Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism -
1
-
1
Chapter 9
9-11
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-6-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Bumper Kit, Frogleg
3
5
1
2
4
Figure 9-5 Bumper Kit, Frogleg, Base Seen From Above
Table 9-7
Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
BUMPER CRASH PAD
-
Bumper Crash Rear
1
-
N
2
BUMPER INNER BOSS
-
-
1
-
N
3
BUMPER RIGHT FROGLEG
-
-
1
-
N
4
BUMPER LEFT FROGLEG
-
-
1
-
N
5
BUMPER INNER BOSS CRASH
-
-
2
-
N
9-12
Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-7
Operator Control Panel Brackets
Bracket on units built before Mid-2002.
Replaced by Item # 192.
191
192
190
193
194
194A
Figure 9-6 Operator Panel Brackets
Table 9-8
Operator Panel Brackets
Item
Part Name
Part Number
190
Storage Tray Bracket
191
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
2306018
1
-
2
Upper Casting Bracket
2291449
1
-
2
192
“U” Bracket
2330476
1
-
2
193
TV/TR Front Bracket
2306021
1
-
2
194
Bulkhead Bracket
2305886
1
-
2
194A
Bulkhead Bracket
5119174
1
-
1
‘U’ Shaped Bracket, Nut is Attached to Casting
Does Not Include s
Through BT03 with SVGA Style
BT04 with DVI Style
Chapter 9
9-13
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-8
Gas Spring
WARNING WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE GAS SPRING IS
COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY. DURING NORMAL OPERATION
THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR AND THE MECHANICAL FORCE
OF THE GAS SPRING ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE IF/WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THIS
GAS SPRING. PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND
THE SPRING PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE
ELEVATION ASSEMBLY.
4
3
2
1
1A
Figure 9-7 Gas Spring
Table 9-9
Item
Gas Spring
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
1
-
1
- Same as Vivid 7BT’04 and earlier
1
Gas Spring
080X4500
NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been
factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part
5160374.
For CRT or LCD, BT’06 and later
1A
9-14
Gas Spring (BT’06)
5160374
NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been
factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part
5160374.
Section 9-8 - Gas Spring
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-9
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Gas Spring (Continued)
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
2
Socket, Wire Cross Spring
FB307376
Socket for Gas Spring release cable
1
-
1
3
Spring for Release Wire
080X4010
1
-
1
4
Nipple Screws
080X4530
1
-
1
Chapter 9
9-15
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-9
Monitor Assembly
9-9-1
CRT Monitor Assembly
252
259
253
251
258
256
257
260
254
255
Figure 9-8 Monitor Assembly - Standard
Table 9-10
Item
Monitor Assembly - Standard
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-
1
-
1
1
-
2
2
-
2
251
Open Frame Monitor
2283334-4
252
Monitor Cable Assembly
2304171
253
Speaker and Mounting Bracket Kit
2297882
254
Monitor Tilt/Swivel/Male Post
2284225
Neck Assembly
1
-
2
255
Monitor Rear Cover Assembly
2303930
Assembly with Speaker Grills
1
-
2
256
Monitor Left Speaker Grill
2279675
Labeled as the LEFT Speaker Grill
1
-
2
257
Monitor Right Speaker Grill
2279676
Labeled as the RIGHT Speaker Grill
1
-
2
258
Monitor Screw Caps (covers)
2303932
Covers the screws on each side in the back of the
cover - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-
2
-
2
259
Monitor Front Bezel Assembly
2303929-2
Includes three logos Vivid 7, LOGIQ 7 and LOGIQ 9
1
-
2
260
Monitor Switch Assembly
2297050
User Switch Assembly
1
-
2
9-16
- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7see Callout 545 on page 9-44
Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-9-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD
261 261A
263
264
265
270
266
262
269
268
269A
267
271
272
Figure 9-9 Monitor Assembly - LCD 17”
Item
Table 9-11
Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
Going obsolete. If unavailable, use 5169935-2
1
-
1
261
17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display
5125393
261A
17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display
5169935-2
1
-
1
262
17 inch Speaker Set
5132576
1
-
1
263
17 inch Panel Front LCD
5132572
1
-
1
264
17 inch Panel Rear LCD
5132573
1
-
1
265
17 inch Rear Cover VESA LCD
5166624
1
-
1
266
17 inch Mic & Switch Assembly LCD
5137744
1
-
1
267
17 inch LCD ARM
5130651
1
-
1
268
17 inch LCD Arm Gas Spring
5224462
1
-
1
269
LCD Video Card
5111298
Matrox card - If no longer available, order 5111298-2
1
-
1
269A
LCD Video Card
5111298-2
Matrox card
1
-
1
270
17 inch LCD Cables (4)
5135957
1
-
1
271
17 inch Spiral Wrap - 1/2”
5152397
1/2” - Power and DVI HDMI cables
1
-
1
272
17 inch Spiral Wrap - 3/8”
5152399
3/8” - Speaker and Ground cables
1
-
1
273
17 inch LCD Adapter
5135957-6
HDMI to DVI-I adapter
1
-
1
BT06 and later
17 “ LCD Arm Assembly with (4) cables
Chapter 9
9-17
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-9-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD
276
277
280
285
277A
278
286 286A 288
287
281
282
283
284
281A
282
283A
284A
283B
279
Figure 9-10 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD
Item
Table 9-12
Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
276
19 inch LCD Monitor
5212808
19” LCD Monitor,
also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap and (1)
46-208747P1 ty wrap mount
1
-
1
277
19 inch LCD Rear Cover
5199018
Rear Cover
1
-
1
277A
19 inch LCD Rear Cover Screw
46-312358P36
Screw for Rear Cover
1
-
1
278
Adaptor Power Supply Assy
5212977
Power Supply, Ty wraps
1
-
1
279
19 inch LCD Speaker Assy
5199460
19” LCD Speaker Assembly
1
-
1
280
19 inch LCD ARM
5212677
19” LCD Arm Assembly
1
-
1
281
19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable
5198235-2
Microphone Cable
crosses up to 5256603
1
-
1
281A
19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable
5256603
Microphone Cable, alternate to 5198235-2
1
-
1
282
19 inch LCD Video Cable
5214911
Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps,
crosses up to 5256600
1
-
1
9-18
Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-12
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD (Continued)
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
282A
19 inch LCD Video Cable
5256600
Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps,
alternate to 5214911
1
-
1
283
19 inch LCD DC Power
5212254
DC Power Cable, also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap,
crosses up to 5256601 and 5256601-1
1
-
1
283A
19 inch LCD DC Power
5256601
DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254,
obsolete, use 5256601-1
1
-
1
283B
19 inch LCD DC Power
5256601-1
DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254
1
-
1
284
19 inch LCD Speaker Cable
5198216
Speaker Cable, crosses up to 5256602
1
-
1
284A
19 inch LCD Speaker Cable
5256602
Speaker Cable, alternate to 5198216
1
-
1
285
19 inch LCD Arm Adaptor Assy
5220151
Arm Adaptor Assy - Bushing and Screw
1
-
1
286
19 inch LCD AC Power Cable
5198490
Power Cable AC, crosses up to 5256605
1
-
1
286A
19 inch LCD AC Power Cable
5256605
Power Cable AC, alternate to 5198490
1
-
1
287
19 inch Subwoofer Ground
Reference Cable
5234477
Adapter between subwoofer/gel warmer PS
and gel warmer
1
-
1
288
19 inch LCD AC Power Cable
5256605-2
LCD power cable (longer) used on BT01, BT02, BT03
LCD factory upgrades
1
-
1
Chapter 9
9-19
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-10
Operator Control Panel Assembly
9-10-1
Upper Op Panel
201 201A 201B 201C 201D 201E
203 203A
204
Inside
Touch Panel
Assembly
205
202 202A 202B
Figure 9-11 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Upper
Table 9-13
Console
Type
FRU
Console/Operator Panel Compatibility Matrix
BT01/02/03
- OR BT01/02/03 console upgraded to
BT07 and Later BEP 4.1
2188902-3 (obsolete)
Upper Operator Panel
Assembly
2188902-13 (obsolete)
Lower Operator Panel
Assembly
2188902-xx
LCD Backlight Inverter
TGC (Slide Pot) PWA
2188902-33
BT04/06/07
BEP 3.x
Forward Production
BT07/BT09
CRU
2404652 -103
-
2404652-3 (obsolete)
2404652-13
2188902-6 (obsolete)
2188902-16
2188902-7
2404652-xx
-
2404652-6
-
2404652-7
-
Bezel - Upper Op Panel
2188902-15
-
Slide Pot Knobs
5115063
Y
9-20
Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-10
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Operator Control Panel Assembly (cont’d)
Table 9-14
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
201
Upper Operator Panel Assembly
2188902-3
Obsolete - use 2188902-13
1
-
N
201A
Upper Operator Panel Assembly
2188902-13
1
-
1
201B
Upper Operator Panel Assembly
2188902-33
has USB port - new style spacer between bezel &
touchpanel
Replaces 2188902-13
1
-
1
201C
Upper Operator Panel Assembly
2404652-3
BT04 Only - with simplified cable interface.
If unavailable, use 2404652-13.
Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2
1
-
1
201D
Upper Operator Panel Assembly
2404652-13
BT04 and later consoles
Must be used with BEP4.1 (LVDS) or BEP 3.x
Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2
1
-
1
201E
Upper Operator Panel Assembly
2404652-103
Must use with BEP4.0 (DVI)
Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-xx
1
-
1
202
LCD Backlight Inverter
2188902-6
1
-
1
202A
LCD Backlight Inverter
2404652-6
BT04 and later - Use with 2404652-3 or 2404652-13
Cannot be used with 2188902 series op panels
1
-
1
202B
LCD Backlight Inverter
2188902-16
Backward compatible with 2188902-6
1
-
1
203
TGC (Slide Pot) PWA
2188902-7
Circuit board slide pot - For use with Upper Op Panel
2188902-3 or 2188902-13
1
-
1
203A
TGC (Slide Pot) PWA
2404652-7
Circuit board slide pot - Use w/Upper Op Panel
2404652-3 or -13
1
-
1
204
Bezel - Upper Operator Panel
2188902-15
1
-
1
205
Slide Pot Knobs
1
-
1
5115063
has USB port A
Use 2188902-33 (when 2188902-13 no longer available)
Use with 2188902-3 or -13
When depleted, use 2188902-16
Group of ten knobs on TGC PWA
Chapter 9
9-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-10-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Lower Operator Panel
211 211A
211B
211C
217
211D 211E
216
224
212 212A 212B 212C
213 213A 213B
225
214 214A 214B
222 222A 223 223A
215 215A 215B
Figure 9-12 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower
Table 9-15
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
211
Lower Operator Panel Assembly
2188902-2
- Obsolete use 2188902-32
1
-
N
211A
Lower Operator Panel Assembly
2188902-12
1
-
N
With Standby. Backward compatible.
R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE this part.
When depleted, use 2188902-32.
211B
211C
Lower Operator Panel Assembly
Lower Operator Panel Assembly
2188902-32
BT03 lower op panel with 4D markings on buttons
1
-
1
2404652-2
BT’04 with simplified cable interface
Can only be used with upper op panel 2404652-xx
(May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-4
if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)
When depleted, use 2404652-32.
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
N
1
-
N
Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops
211D
Lower Operator Panel Assembly
2404652-12
Can only be used with upper op panel
2404652-1xx
(May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-14
if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)
When depleted, use 2404652-32
211E
Lower Operator Panel Assembly
2404652-32
212
A/N Keyboard - English
2188902-4
212A
A/N Analog Keyboard - English
2188902-14
Lower OP Panel Assembly BT07 and later.
Includes 2404652-15 trackball.
Backward compatible with 2404652-12, -2
Must be used with upper op panel:
2404652-3, -13, or -103
May be used with BEP 3.x, BEP 4.0 or BEP 4.1
Alpha Numeric Keyboard
R3.X.X Software MUST USE 2188902-14
Obsolete - use 2188902-14
With Standby. Backward compatible.
R3.X.X Software MUST USE this part
When depleted, use 2404652-4 or 2404652-14.
Do NOT use 2188902-14 in 2404652-x op panel.
9-22
Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-15
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower (Continued)
Item
Part Name
Part Number
212B
A/N Analog Keyboard - English
2404652-4
212C
A/N Analog Keyboard - English
2404652-14
213
A/N Keyboard - Russian
2188902-20
213A
A/N Keyboard - Russian
2404652-20
213B
A/N Keyboard - Russian
2404652-50
214
A/N Keyboard - Greek
2188902-21
214A
A/N Keyboard - Greek
2404652-21
214B
A/N Keyboard - Greek
2404652-51
215
Trackball
215A
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytop.
Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.
1
-
1
As required
1
-
1
1
-
1
Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops
1
-
1
As required
1
-
1
1
-
1
Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops
1
-
1
2188902-5
When depleted, use 2404652-15.
1
-
1
Trackball Assembly
2404652-5
When depleted, use 2404652-15.
1
-
1
215B
Trackball Assembly
2404652-15
Backward compatible with 2404652-5, 2188902-5
1
-
1
216
4D Probe Holder
5111708
1
Y
1
217
Bezel - Lower Operator Panel
2188902-11
1
-
1
222
A/N Keyboard - Swedish
2404652-22
Use 2404652-52 (when 2404652-22 stock is depleted)
1
-
1
222A
A/N Keyboard - Swedish
2404652-52
Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops
1
-
1
223
A/N Keyboard - Norwegian
2404652-26
Use 2404652-56 (when 2404652-26 stock is depleted)
1
-
1
223A
A/N Keyboard - Norwegian
2404652-56
Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops
1
-
1
224
Single Shaft Encoder
066E2306
Replacement part for all lower op panels:
e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12
1
-
1
225
Concentric Shaft Encoder
2404652-19
Replacement part for all lower op panels:
e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12
1
-
1
BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting
When depleted, use 2404652-14.
Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.
BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting
When depleted, use 2404652-50.
BT’04 and BT06 improved back lighting
When depleted, use 2404652-51.
Chapter 9
9-23
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-10-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs
218 218A
222
219
221
219A
220
Figure 9-13 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower
9-24
Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-10-3
Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs (cont’d)
Table 9-16
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower - Buttons and Knobs
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
Universal Knob Kit
2384216
Obsolete - order 5114700
1
-
N
218A
Universal Knob Kit
5114700
All blue gumdrop knobs - Replaces 2384216
This Kit contained; 4 small domed knobs, 4 large
dished knobs, 6 large domed knobs
same as Vivid 7
1
Y
1
219
Programmable Button Keytop
Kit
2188902-9
Key caps for customer to customize the P1 - P4 key
caps
1
Y
1
219A
Button Cap Kit
2188902-10
Includes all buttons (except thumb buttons)
1
Y
1
220
Key Ring and Operator Panel
Mode select Knob Kit
2188902-8
Includes: 4 Mode select knobs (Inner & Outer
pieces) and Key Ring
1
-
N
221
Mode Select Knob Kit with 3D/
4D Button with XYZ markings
2404652-8
Four Mode Select Knobs (M, PW, CF, B) and 3D/4D
Grey Bowl Button
1
Y
1
222
F5 and F6 A/N keytops
2404652-9
F5 and F6 A/N keytops, along with key puller
1
Y
1
218
Part Name
Chapter 9
9-25
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-11
Front End Processor Assembly
406A
407
404
406
403
402 402A
BT’01
Card
Rack
401
408
409
409A 409C
409D
405 405A
BT’02, BTCard Rack
411 through 411F
412
413
414
Empty Card Slot
402B 402C 402D
406B
402E
406C
405B
405C
405D
410
410A
408A
409B 409E
409F 409G 409H
Figure 9-14 Front End Processor Assembly
9-26
Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Front End Processor Assembly (cont’d)
R7.X.X/R9.X.X
Item
Part
Name
Part
Number
401
Back Plane
2260219
X
402
SCB1
2260214-2
X
402A SCB1.1
2260214-3
X1
402B SCB2
2365739
X
X X
402C SCB2
2365739-3
X
X X
402D SCB2-4
2365739-4
X
X X
402E SCB2-5
2365739-5
X
X X
403
BMP4
2260207
404
EQ4
405
TD4
405A TD4.1
405B TD5
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5150000-x (BT06)
X
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2404587-X (BT04)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT’02)
LOGIQ 9
Model Number
X
X
X
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)
R6.X.X
5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R4.X.X
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R3.X.X
H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R2.X.X
2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)
Applications Software
Front End Processor Assembly
2375600-X (BT’03)
Table 9-17
2188900-X (BT’01)
Section 9-11
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Description
X
X
X
Q C F
t R R
y U U
Front End Back Plane
1
-
2
Scan Control Board. Use
2260214-3 if stock is
depleted
1
-
1
Scan Control Board 1
Required if using EBM Board
-
1
Has BT03 Functionality Obsolete
1
-
N
X
X
X
Included power up transmit
overload fix - Obsolete
1
-
N
X
X
X
X
Additional transmit overload
1
fix during run time - Obsolete
-
N
X
X
X
X
Supervisory Circuit and 4D
Reset Updates.
1
-
1
X
B-Mode Processor
1
-
1
2260210
X
Equalization Board
1
-
1
2260194-2
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Transmit/Delay Board. When
stock depleted order
2260194-3
1
-
1
2260194-3
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Transmit/Delay Board
You can mix TD4s and
TD4.1s
1
-
1
1
-
1
2362863
X
X
X
X
Chapter 9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
New power requirements
different from TD4. Can not
mix with TD4s. Requires
FEPS3
You can mix TD5s and
TD5.1s
When stock depleted order
2386031
9-27
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
R7.X.X/R9.X.X
Item
Part
Name
2386031
405D TD6
5142651
406
2260212
X
2341985-2
X
406A RF AMP1.2
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)
5150000-x (BT06)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)
2404587-X (BT04)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)
Part
Number
405C TD5.1
RF AMP
2351100-X (BT’02)
LOGIQ 9
Model Number
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
Description
X
X
X
X
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R6.X.X
5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R4.X.X
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R3.X.X
H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R2.X.X
2375600-X (BT’03)
Applications Software
Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
2188900-X (BT’01)
Table 9-17
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
X
X
Q C F
t R R
y U U
Same Function as TD5 but
larger and fewer ASICs. You
can mix TD5s and TD5.1s
1
-
1
Not Backward Compatible -Used with R6.0.0 and later.
1
-
1
Radio Frequency Amplifier
Board
Obsolete - Use 2341985-2
1
-
N
Design Improvement
1
-
1
1
-
1
New power requirement
different from RF AMP1.X
Requires FEPS3
406B RF AMP2
2357621
X4
X4
X4
406C RF AMP2-2
2357621-2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
407
XDIF
2260221
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
408
Top Plane
2291656
X4
X4
X4
X4
408A Top Plane
5115468
X
X
409
9-28
FEPS
2260203
X X
X
X
X
X4 X4
X4 X4
X
Must only use 5115468 T
Plane
Use 2357621-2 if stock
depleted
X
X
X
Same as RF Amp 2-2 except
has schottky diodes
Must use 2291656 Top
Plane
1
-
1
X
X
X
Transducer Interface Board 1
-
1
1
-
1
Has schottky diodes
1
-
1
Front End Power Supply Obsolete When replaced with
2273641-3 or 2273641-4,
requires replacement of the
Front End Card Rack Cover
in Kit 2374426
1
-
N
Top Plane connects XDIF to
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 RF Amp on front of cards.
No schotky diodes
X
X
X
X
X3
Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)
R7.X.X/R9.X.X
Item
Part
Name
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5150000-x (BT06)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2404587-X (BT04)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT’02)
LOGIQ 9
Model Number
Part
Number
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)
R6.X.X
5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R4.X.X
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R3.X.X
H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R2.X.X
2375600-X (BT’03)
Applications Software
Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
2188900-X (BT’01)
Table 9-17
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Description
Q C F
t R R
y U U
409A FEPS2
2273641-3
X3
X
X X
X
X
X
Second Generation FEPS
Cross to a FEPS2.1 if stock is
depleted
May require Front End Card
Rack cover kit 2374426 if
replacing a 2260203 FEPS
409B FEPS2.1
2273641-4
X3
X
X X
X
X
X
Second Generation with
Standby Capabilities cross
up to -6
1
-
1
409C FEPS2.5
2273641-5
X3
X
X X
X
X
X
partial latch fix (all but -5 V
analog)
1
-
1
409D FEPS2.6
2273641-6
X3
X
X X
X
X
X
Replaces FEPS2
(2273641-3) and FEPS2.1
(2273641-4)
Only applies to TD4 systems
1
-
1
1
-
N
409E FEPS3
2376843
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Analog Voltages are +/- 6V
and 13V compared to +/-5v
and 12V found in FEPS,
FEPS2 and FEPS2.1
Must use in systems w/
TD5.X and RF Amp2 (DO
NOT use in R2.X.X systems
or
Systems upgraded to BT’03)
1
-
1
Transmit overload fix
(2376843-6): Replaces
237643 and 2376843-3, FMI
70188.
2376843-92 replaces
2376843-2 (for BT03
systems with TD5.x boards)
409F FEPS3.2
2376843-2
X
409G FEPS3.3
2376843-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Partial latch fix (all but -6 V
analog)
1
-
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replaces 2376843 and
2376843-2
1
-
1
Chapter 9
9-29
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
R7.X.X/R9.X.X
Part
Name
Part
Number
409H FEPS3.6
2376843-6
Item
410
FEP AC
Line Filter &
Cable
410A FEP AC
Line Filter
2315960
X
X
2375555
X
X
X
X
X
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)
5150000-x (BT06)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)
2404587-X (BT04)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT’02)
LOGIQ 9
Model Number
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Description
X
X*
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R6.X.X
5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R4.X.X
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R3.X.X
H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R2.X.X
2375600-X (BT’03)
Applications Software
Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
2188900-X (BT’01)
Table 9-17
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
X
X
X
X
X
Q C F
t R R
y U U
Replaces FEPS3 to eliminate
transmit overload.
1
-
1
Attached to side of FEP Card
Rack, Includes Line Filter
and Power Harness
Obsolete, use 2375555
except for BT01
1
-
1
Backward compatible for
BT07 and earlier,
*except for BT01 systems.
1
-
1
1
-
N
EBM
2273639-3
X2
X
Combined functions of EQ4
& BMP4. Positioned in the
old EQ4 Slot. Needs SCB
2260214-3
Obsolete - replace with
2273639-6
411A EBM
2273639-6
X
X
I2C Reliability Improvements
1
-
1
411B EBM1.8
2273639-5
X
X X
EBM Board Upgraded to
EBM2 functionality - Replace
with EBM2, 2273639-21
1
-
N
411C EBM2
2273639-20
X
X X
Has BT03 Functionality obsolete - Replace with
2273639-21
1
-
N
411D EBM2
2273639-21
X
X X
Has BT’03 Functionality - I2C
Reliability Improvements
1
-
1
1
-
N
1
-
1
411
411E EBM2.5
2273639-23
X
X
X
Has BT’04 Functionality
4D Option requires
2273639-24
X
Obsolete - replace with
2273639-24
411F EBM2.6
9-30
2273639-24
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly
X
Has BT’04 Functionality
Required for 4D Option
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)
R7.X.X/R9.X.X
Item
412
413
Part
Name
Part
Number
FEP Card
Cage Front
Cover Kit
2374426
FEP Card
Cage Front
Cover Kit
5159491
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5150000-x (BT06)
X
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2404587-X (BT04)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT’02)
LOGIQ 9
Model Number
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)
R6.X.X
5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R4.X.X
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R3.X.X
H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)
R2.X.X
2375600-X (BT’03)
Applications Software
Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
2188900-X (BT’01)
Table 9-17
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Description
X
X
Obsolete, use 5159491
X
X
X
X
X
Required if upgrading from
FEPS to FEPS2/FEP2.1
Additional shielding around
Top Plane and Power Supply
areas. Labels included in kit
to match FEP configuration.
Q C F
t R R
y U U
1
-
N
1
-
1
1
-
1
Corrects barber pole artifact.
414
1
Card Cage
2373269
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Cover with power supply
shield
SCB1 can be used on this model number also.
2
EBM can be used on this model replacing the BMP4 and EQ4. However EBM requires SCB1.1 at a minimum.
3
FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 can be used on this model number. However, must also use FEP Card Rack Cover Kit 2374426.
4
Combination of Top Plane and RF AMP must have at least one schotky diode. Therefore, never use 2357621 and
2291656 together.
Chapter 9
9-31
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-12
I/O Interfaces
301
302 302A
303
USB MODEM OPTION
INTERNAL
I/0
Connects to
Phone Line
w/ Modem
BEP
MODEM
C18
w/ Modem
304
303A
Figure 9-15 I/O Interfaces
9-32
Section 9-12 - I/O Interfaces
302B
302C
302D
302E
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-12
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
I/O Interfaces (cont’d)
Table 9-18
Item
Part Name
301
302
I/O Interfaces
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
External I/O Assembly
FB200198
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
Internal I/O Assembly
FB200197
1
-
N
1
-
N
1
-
1
1
-
N
- Same as Vivid 7 Obsolete - Use FC200423
- Same as Vivid 7 -
302A
Internal I/O Assembly
FC200423
Has gain increase for improved microphone performance
Used on BT03 and earlier
Obsolete - Use FC200695
302B
Internal I/O Assembly
FC200695
Replaces FC200423
302C
Internal IO W/Gender change
FC200503
BT04 Only - Has male connector for II/O to BEP cable
- Same as Vivid 7 Obsolete - Use FC200889
302D
Internal IO W/Gender change
FC200651
Obsolete - Use FC200889
1
-
N
302E
Internal IO W/Gender change
FC200889
BT04 systems and later - replaces FC200503 and
FC200651
1
-
1
303
Global Modem Assembly
2245794
Multi-Tech - New installation requires cable kit #2368850
-Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
303A
USB Global Modem Kit
5112680
1
-
1
1
-
1
Includes modem 5114058, and Telco Adapter Kit
2249450
Used with BEP3 only
304
USB Modem
5114058
Includes USB Modem, USB Cable, and phone cables
Used with BEP3 only
Chapter 9
9-33
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-13
3-D Externals
470
471
Figure 9-16 3-D Externals
Table 9-19
3-D Externals
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
470
3-D Externals - PCI Bird Transmitter
2301019-4
Option Kit
1
-
1
471
3-D Externals - PCI Bird Receiver
2301019-5
Option Kit
1
-
1
9-34
Section 9-13 - 3-D Externals
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-14
Back End Processor Assemblies
9-14-1
BEP 1
450 451
452
454
453
Figure 9-17 BEP 1
Table 9-20
Item
450
451
Back End Processor Assembly 1
Part Name
Back End Processor (BEP1)
Back End Processor (BEP1)
w/ 3-D Option
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
2266548-3
BEP1 - P3 Processor
1
-
1
2266548-4
(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included See Table 9-19)
1
-
1
P3 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option
452
Back End Processor Power
Supply
2348186-38
Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X
1
-
1
453
BEP Battery Assembly
2266548-5
Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.
Expected battery life is 1 year
1
-
2
-Same as Vivid 7 454
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 1
2366650
Will need to transfer mounting tray to new HDD
1
-
1
455
BIOS Blaster CD
2266548-27
BEP1 only
1
-
1
456
Battery, CMOS
2404028-7
Motherboard battery
1
-
1
BEP1 Repairable
2266548-13
BEP1
Chapter 9
-
9-35
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-14-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
BEP 2
460
460A
460B
460C
460D
463
461
469
464
465
462
466 466A
467
Figure 9-18 BEP 2
Table 9-21
Back End Processor Assembly 2
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
460
Back End Processor (BEP2.0)
2348186-3
P4 Processor
1
-
1
1
-
1
460
Back End Processor (BEP 2.0)
w/ 3-D Option
2348186-4, -74
P4 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed
(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)
460
Back End Processor (BEP2.1)
2348186-43, -73
BEP2.1 with 2.3 Power Supply
1
-
1
460
Back End Processor (BEP2.1)
2348186-44, -74
BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with 2.3 Power Supply
1
-
1
9-36
Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-21
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Back End Processor Assembly 2 (Continued)
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
460A
Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)
2348186-67, -73
BEP2.0.1w/SB0220 Audio Card
1
-
1
460A
Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)
2348186-68, -74
BEB2.0.1 w/SB0220 Audio Card with FOB
1
-
1
460A
Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)
2348186-77, -73
BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card
1
-
1
460A
Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)
2348186-78, -74
BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card w/ FOB
1
-
1
460B
Back End Processor (BEP2.1)
2348186-13
P4 Processor with Digital VIC Card
1
-
1
2348186-14
with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed
1
-
1
460C
Back End Processor (BEP 2.1)
w/ 3-D Option
P4 Processor (Digital VIC Card)
(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)
460C
Back End Processor (BEP2.1)
2348186-53, -73
BEP2.1 with New Sound Card
1
-
1
460C
Back End Processor (BEP2.1)
2348186-54
BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with New Sound Card
1
-
1
460C
Back End Processor (BEP2.1)
2348186-57
BEP2.1 w/o Base Image
1
-
1
460C
Back End Processor (BEP2.1)
2348186-58
BEP2.1 w/o Base Image w/ FOB
1
-
1
460D
Back End Processor (BEP2.2)
2348186-63, -73
1
-
1
460D
Back End Processor (BEP 2.2)
w/ 3-D Option
2348186-64
1
-
1
460D
Back End Processor (BEP2.2)
2348186-73
BEP2.2 Sound Card Change
1
-
1
460D
Back End Processor (BEP 2.2)
2348186-74
BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” Sound Card Change
1
-
1
460D
Back End Processor (BEP2.2)
2348186-83
BEP2.2 PC2IP II Board
1
-
1
460D
Back End Processor (BEP 2.2)
2348186-84
BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” PC2IP II Board
1
-
1
461
Back End Processor Power
Supply
2348186-38
Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X
1
-
1
462
BEP Battery Assembly
2266548-5
Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.
Expected battery life is 1 year
1
-
2
With Version 2.3 Power Supply
Memory Upgrade to 768M
With Version 2.3 Power Supply
Memory Upgrade to 768M
-Same as Vivid 7 463
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 2.x
2348186-31
Comes with bracket or mounting tray
1
-
1
464
Patient I/O Module
2348186-22
BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
465
MOD Drive
2348186-23
BEP 2.0 Only - 1.3 Gigabyte IDE - 3.5 inch
1
-
1
466
CD-RW Drive
2348186-37
1
-
N
466A
CD-RW Drive
2348186-47
BEP 2.x
Obsolete - Use 2404028
1
-
N
467
Fan
2348186-35
Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 2.x Only
1
-
1
468
BIOS Blaster CD
2348186-27
BEP2.x only
1
-
2
469
Battery, CMOS
2404028-7
Motherboard battery
1
-
1
BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 Obsolete - Use 2404028
Chapter 9
9-37
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-14-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
BEP 3.x / 4.x
482
475
480
475A
475B
481 481A
475C
476
477
478
478A
479
475D
475E
475F
475G
477A
BEP4.x
478B
485
486
484
Figure 9-19 BEP 3.x / 4.x
9-38
Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies
BEP3.x
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-14-3BEP 3.x / 4.x (cont’d)
Table 9-22
Item
Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
Complete assembly
1
-
1
Complete assembly
1
-
1
BEP3.0, Non-”Flock of Birds”
2404027-3
(new PC2IPIIB)
(2404027-13)
475A
BEP3.0, with ”Flock of Birds”
(new PC2IPIIB)
(2404027-14)
475B
BEP 3.5 Non-”Flock of Birds”
2404027-53
Complete assembly
1
-
1
475C
BEP 3.5 with ”Flock of Birds”
2404027-54
Complete assembly
1
-
1
475D
BEP 4.0
Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new
PC2IP3)
5162777-3
Complete assembly
1
-
1
475E
BEP 4.0
with ”Flock of Birds”, (new
PC2IP3)
5162777-4
Complete assembly
1
-
1
475F
BEP 4.1
Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new
PC2IP3)
5162777-7
Complete assembly
1
-
1
475G
BEP 4.1
with ”Flock of Birds”, (new
PC2IP3)
5162777-8
Complete assembly
1
-
1
476
BEP 3.x/ 4.x Power Supply
2404028-4
Also compatible for BEP 4.x
1
-
1
477
PCI DGVIC Assembly
5112272
BEP 3.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables
1
-
1
477A
PCI DGVIC2 Assembly
5301220-2
BEP 4.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables
1
-
1
478
PC2IPII card
FC200312
If unavailable, use FC200656
1
-
1
478A
PC2IPIIB card
FC200656
BEP 3.x
1
-
1
478B
PC2IP3 card
5197846
BEP 4.x only
1
-
1
479
Battery, BEP3.x / 4.x UPS
2404028-6
Set of 2 batteries
Expected battery life is 1 year
1
-
1
480
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 3.x /
4.x
2404028-2
Comes with bracket or mounting tray, and adaptor
1
-
1
481
CD/DVD Drive
2404028
BEP 3 comes with bracket or mounting tray
(LG GSA-4167B replaces the Sony CD-RW Drive)
Includes Patch disk for R2.x and R3.x
1
-
1
481A
CD/DVD Drive
2404028-10
BT06 and later, BEP3.5 and later
1
-
1
482
Battery, CMOS
2404028-7
BEP3.x / BEP 4.x Motherboard battery
1
-
1
483
BEP3.x / 4.x Fan, Side Cover
2404028-5
Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 3.x / BEP 4.x
1
-
1
484
MO Drive (External - stand
alone)
2404028-3
For use with BEP 3 - BEP 3 does not have MO Drive
1
-
1
485
Intake Filter
2404028-8
BEP3.x / BEP 4.x
1
Y
1
475
2404027-4
Chapter 9
9-39
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-22
Item
Part Name
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x (Continued)
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
486
Cover, FIlter
2404028-9
BEP3.x / BEP 4.x
1
Y
1
487
BIOS Blaster CD
5111457
For BEP 3 motherboard reset
(obsolete - replaced with 5111457-3)
1
-
N
487A
BIOS Blaster CD
5111457-3
For BEP 3.x motherboard reset
1
-
1
487B
BIOS Blaster CD
5215511-1
For BEP 4.x motherboard reset
1
-
1
9-40
Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies
2348186-68
2348186-77
2348186-78
2348186-4
2348186-43
2348186-44
2266548-13
2266548-14
2266548-16
NA
NA
2358135-11
R4.1.3 (4)
Current (2) Base
Image Load
NA
R3.0.12(3)
R3.1.1(3)
2358135-11
2371612-13
NA
NA
NA
2371612-13
NA
NA
NA
2371612-13
2348186-67
2348186-3
2266548-12
2371612-13
BEP2.0.1
(Prior to BT03)
BEP2.0
2266548-6
2371612-15
NA
2371612-15
2371612-15
NA
2348186-78
2348186-77
2348186-68
2348186-67
BEP2.0.1
(For BT03)
2371612-13
NA
NA
NA
2371612-13
2348186-58
2348186-57
2348186-54
2348186-53
2348186-14
2348186-13
BEP2.1
2371612-13
NA
NA
NA
2371612-13
2348186-74
2348186-73
2348186-64
2348186-63
BEP2.2
(Prior to BT03)
L9 BEP HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.x
2266548-10
R2.4.0 (1)
Application
Software
2266548-4
2266548-3
2266548-2
2266548
BEP1
Table 9-23
2371612-15
NA
2371612-15
2371612-15
NA
2348186-84
2348186-83
2348186-74
2348186-73
2348186-64
2348186-63
BEP2.2
(For BT03)
2404024-7
2404024-7
NA
NA
NA
2348186-84
2348186-83
2348186-74
2348186-73
2348186-64
2348186-63
BEP2.2
(For BT04)
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Chapter 9
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-15
Software
9-41
9-42
NA
NA
R7.0.5(6)
R9.0.x(7)
Section 9-15 - Software
5135124-3
NA
NA
(6)
5135124-11
5135124-10
NA
NA
5135124-11
5135124-10
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
5135124-11
5135124-10
NA
NA
5135124-11
5135124-10
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
To confirm you have the most current application and baseload information, also see the latest revision of
SN 70419 - LOGIQ 9 Application/Baseload Software Matrix - 5245411-100.
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
(1) Current R2.X Application Software = R2.4.0 (2322686-26).
(2) Base Image Loads for Respective BEP are Backwards compatible.
(3) Current R3.X Application Software = R3.0.11 (2322686-64); R3.0.12 (2322686-63); R3.1.0 Obsolete. See FMI 70200. See Note (3); R3.1.1 Optional FMI 70200.
(4) Current R4.X Application Software = R4.1.3 (2322686-49).
(5) Current R6.X Application Software = R6.0.4 (2322686-56), R6.0.5 (2322686-57) R6.0.6 (2322686-59) FMI 70197.
(6) Current R7.X Application Software = R7.0.2 (2322686-62) , R7.0.4 (2322686-66), and R7.0.5 (2322686-67).
(7) Current R9.X Application Software = R9.0.0 (2322686-70)
Note: See FMI Closure Service Note 70443 for information on late request plan.
R9.x(7)
R7.0.5
5135124-1
NA
2404024-50 Rev 7
2404024-8
R6.0.6(5)
NA
5135124-3
5135124-1
5135124-1
5135124-1
2404024-50
2404024-50
2404024-50
2404024-8
NA
NA
R4.1.3(4)
Current (2) Base Image Load
NA
R7.0.4(6)
R6.0.5(5)
NA
NA
R6.0.4(5)
R7.0.2(6)
NA
R4.1.3(4)
NA
2404024-8
R3.x.x(3)
R6.0.6(5)
NA
R2.x.x(1)
NA
NA
Application Software
BEP 4.1
5162777-7
5162777-8
Section 9-15
2404027-54
BEP 4.0
5162777-3
5162777-4
BEP 3.5
2404027-53
BEP 3
L9 BEP HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.x
2404027-3
2404027-4
Table 9-24
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Software (cont’d)
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-15
Software (cont’d)
Table 9-25
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Software Tools
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
Database Defragmentation
Toolkit
5184818
BT04 and later.
Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use.
1
-
1
HDD Partition Wipe Tool Kit
5329420
1
-
1
See SN 70447
Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use.
.
Chapter 9
9-43
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-16
Interconnect Cables
9-16-1
Peripheral Cables
504
TO CARD RACK
SONY VCR SVO-9500MD
Remote
517B
Right
AUDIO OUT
Left
Right
AUDIO IN
Left
A8
SONY ANALOG
B/W PRINTER
UP890MD
503
B/W Video In
A9
A6
A7
517A
RS-232C
RS-232C
VIDEO OUT
A2
A15
A11
A10
505
516B
SONY ANALOG
COLOR PRINTER
UP-2900MD
Video Output
VIDEO IN
530
RGB & Sync
516A
Speaker
A1
OP PANEL
Audio Amp
Mic Pre Amp
Video / Mic
A3
A14
502
AC Power
Op Control
MONITOR
A4
USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT
500
Video Rcvr
545
A5
USER INTERFACE
TOUCH PANEL
VIDEO
BEP
C22
B5
MONITOR
VIDEO
C13 or D4
COLOR PRNT
VIDEO
D5
545
501
546
B6
Speaker
B7
AC Power
B1
TOUCH PANEL
VIDEO
BEP
C22
B3
B9
Op Control
MONITOR
B2
TO
INTERNAL I/O
BOARD
OP PANEL
Audio Amp
Mic Pre Amp
Video / Mic
B8
500A
Video Rcvr
MONITOR
VIDEO
USER INTERFACE
C13 or D4
BT04 SYSTEMS
548
B4
INTERNAL I/O BOARD
BT06 and later only
Speaker and AC Power
interrupted by Subwoofer
electronics
Figure 9-20 Peripheral Cable Diagram
9-44
530
547
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-16-1
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Peripheral Cables (cont’d)
Table 9-26
Peripheral Cables
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
Top Console and Monitor to IIO, AC Ctrl, BEP and
Gas spring
500
Console Flex Cable Assembly
(complete)
FB200320*
*When replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier
systems, also order 064G1768. Over-molded SVGA
connector requires longer screws (064G1768) to
attach to bulkhead.
500A
Extended-length Jack/Lock
Screws
064G1768
Cable, Main harness w/ DVI
5119218
Longer screws required for modified connector (when
replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems).
BT04 or later
RGB & Sync From PCVIC to Color Printer - #1
-BEP-D5 to RGB Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -
501
Color Printer Video Cable
FB200789
#2 - Same as Vivid 7 -
502
Color Printer Control Cable
FB200790
Chapter 9
9-45
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-26
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Peripheral Cables (Continued)
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
#3 - IIO-A1 to BW/Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -
503
BW/CP Printer Cable
FB200791
1
-
1
504
VCR Cable Harness
2371911
1
-
1
1
-
1
2
-
1
2
-
1
2
-
1
Combines FB200792 & FC200041 & FC200042 &
FC200043 & FC200044
Same as Vivid 7
#4 - IIO-A2 to VCR - Same as Vivid 7 -
505
VCR Remote Control Cable
FB200792
#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR IN - Same as Vivid 7 516A
SVHS Cable, Shielded
FC200041
#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR Out- Same as Vivid 7 516B
SVHS Cable, Shielded
FC200042
#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR IN CH1(L)/CH2(R)
- Same as Vivid 7 517A
9-46
Audio Cable, Shielded
FC200043
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-26
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Peripheral Cables (Continued)
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR OutCH1(L)/CH2(R)
- Same as Vivid 7 517B
Audio Cable, Shielded
FC200044
2
-
1
530
Speaker Cable - Bulkhead
2319024
1
-
1
- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-
545
Monitor Cable Assembly
2304171
1
-
2
546
cable, internal microphone
5119245
1
-
1
547
adapter, DVI to SVGA w mic
(CRT only)
5118498
1
-
1
1
-
1
Found Behind OPIO
548
adapter, SVGA to DVI
(CRT only)
5119495
Found on Back of BEP
Chapter 9
9-47
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-16-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3
TO CARD RACK
SONY VCR SVO-9500MD
Remote
Right
Left
Right
Left
A8
SONY ANALOG
B/W PRINTER
UP890MD
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
B/W Video In
A9
RS-232C
A6
A7
RS-232C
VIDEO OUT
A2
A15
A11
Video Output
VIDEO IN
S-Video In
75 ohm Off
A10
SONY ANALOG
COLOR PRINTER
UP-2900MD
UP-51MD
If No VCR
use A10
A1
A3
A14
549
549
A4
A5
INTERNAL
I/O BOARD
Figure 9-21 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3
Table 9-27
Item
549
9-48
Part Name
Cable, S-Video
Analog Color Printer W/BEP3
Part Number
Description
5113288
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-16-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables
BW PRINTER UP-D895
BEP
BW
PRINTER
SONY
UP-D895
2353228
C21
560
COLOR PRINTER UP-D50
BEP
561
C20
A5 COLOR
PRINTER
SONY
UP-D50
2354406
COLOR PRINTER UP-D21, 23, 55
BEP
562
C20
2353228
COLOR
PRINTER
SONY
UP-D21, 23, 55
Figure 9-22 USB Printer Cables
Table 9-28
USB Printer Cables
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
560
CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M
2353228
BEP C21 to BW Printer Sony UP-D895
1
-
1
561
USB TO SCSI ADAPTER
2354406
From C20 to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input
1
-
1
562
CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M
2353228
BEP C20 to Color Printer Sony UP-D21, UP-D23,
UP-D55
1
-
1
Chapter 9
9-49
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-16-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Distribution Cables
551
To Color Printer
To Wireless Mic
To Color Printer
To VCR
550
To BW Printer
BT04 or Systems with 4D
To Color Printer
Reserved for Wireless Mic
AC
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
To VCR
540
To BW Printer
Thru BT03
AC CONTROL
BOX P7
XFMR BOX
Part of Main Cable
To Op Panel
P5
P8
515
P6
AC
Adapter
P9
514
541
541A
513
542A 542M
to
P101
P10
To BEP
P11
To Card Rack
P100
INTERNAL I/O
A14
507
Fan
507A
A13
A16
A15
A12
Figure 9-23 AC Distribution Cable Diagram
9-50
#500
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
Serial
Modem
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-16-4
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Table 9-29
AC Distribution Cables
Part Name
Part
Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8
507
Fan Speed Control Cable
FB200795
507A
Fan Speed Control Cable if EQ4
PWA (2260210) is Rev K or
earlier
2333827
513
AC-Distribution Cable Kit
FB200802
AC Mains 1 Cable
FB200803
#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8
Includes FB200802-1, FB200802-2, FB200802-3 &
FB200802-4
#14 - ACT-M1 to ACP-F6 - Same as Vivid 7 514
#15 - ACT-M2 to ACP-F7 - Same as Vivid 7 515
AC Mains 2 Cable
FB200804
540
AC Peripheral Cable
070C5080
AC to Color & B/W Printers and VCR
3
-
1
541
AC Power Cord - USA
2162856
Obsolete - replaced by 2286301
1
Y
N
541A
AC Power Cord - USA
2286301
1
Y
1
1
Y
N
1
Y
1
1
Y
1
1
Y
1
If unavailable, order 5148381
Obsolete
542
AC Power Cord - Outside USA
2118615
542A
AC Power Cord - Outside USA
070C3194
Order only if a dedicated cord (5148381-x) for the
specific country is unavailable.
H4000ZA
542B
AC Power Cord - North America
5148381
H4000ZK
542C
AC Power Cord - Japan
5148381-2
Chapter 9
9-51
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-29
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Distribution Cables (Continued)
Part Name
Part
Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
Y
1
1
Y
1
1
Y
1
1
Y
1
H4000ZB
542D
AC Power Cord - Europe
5148381-3
H4000ZD
542E
AC Power Cord - UK/Ireland
5148381-4
H4000ZC
542F
AC Power Cord - China
5148381-5
H4000ZL
542G
AC Power Cord - Switzerland
5148381-7
H4000ZE
542H
AC Power Cord - Denmark
5148381-8
1
Y
1
542J
AC Power Cord - Israel
5322309
1
Y
1
542K
AC Power Cord - India
5323270
1
Y
1
542L
AC Power Cord - Argentina
5323275
1
Y
1
542M
AC Power Cord - Australia
(Orange)
5323129
1
Y
1
9-52
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-29
Item
Part Name
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Distribution Cables (Continued)
Part
Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
550
Cable, 3 Head AC Power
FC200571
1
-
1
551
Cable, AC Power Split Y
5112631
1
-
1
Required If Using 3 Head AC Power Cable and Voice
Command
Chapter 9
9-53
9-54
PCI SLOT 3
PC2IP
PC2IP
PCI SLOT 4
NON-PCI SLOT
SVGA IN
SCAN
CONVERT
D5
RGB
OUT
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
Figure 9-24 BEP 1.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram
BEP1.0
2266548-4
BEP 1.0 with 3D option
2266548-3
BEP 1.0 without 3D option
PCI SLOT 5
PARALLEL
COM2
COM1
USB2
USB1
10/100bT
OPTION
C5
KEY
C7
C6
C3
C4
C17
50F
Cable # 500
TO LCD
FLAT PANEL
Cable # 529
TO FRONT END
CARD RACK
SCB
Cable # 520
Cable # 531
Cable # 508
See # 536
Cable # 509
Cable # 518
Cable # 519
Cable # 508
C13
C18
C10
C11
C9
C16
C12
D3
B8
B7
B2
B1
B3
B4
B9
B5
B6
12C to
RS232
VIDEO
SWITCH
12C
PORT
TRIGGER
COMP VIDEO
SVIDEO L
SVIDEO C
SVGA VIDEO
MIC EN
VCR AUDIO EN
MIC EN
TC ON SW1
Rack Power
SVIDEO L TO VCR
SVIDEO C TO VCR
SVIDEO L FROM VCR
SVIDEO C FROM VCR
SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT
SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT
COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT
SVIDEO L TO BW PRT
BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2
"Off Path"
"On Path"
TC ON SW1
TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE
INTERNAL I/O
VCR AUDIO EN
AUDIO TO OP PANEL
MIC FROM OP PANEL
PS_ON
12C
12C
RS232 #2
RS232 #1
USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL
A8
A9
A6
A7
12C
A10
A11
A1
A3
A2
A5
A4
SVIDEO TO VCR
PHONE
USB
REMOTE EXP 2
REMOTE EXP 1
Cable # 517B
Cable # 517A
AUDIO FROM VCR
AUDIO TO VCR
FROM MODEM
TO MODEM
Cable # 506
12C
PORT
FOOTSWITCH
SERIAL
10/100bT
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
TRIGGER
VIDEO OUT
BW VIDEO OUT
SVIDEO OUT
SVGA VIDEO
OUT
EXTERNAL I/O
Cable # 516A
SVIDEO FROM VCR
TO
PRINTERS
SPARE
TO VCR
Cable # 516B
Cable # 503
Cable # 502
Cable # 504
TO OP
PANEL
Cable # 500
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
AGP VIDEO
AGP SLOT
PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS)
ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES
PCI SLOT 1
SOUND CARD
AUDIO LINE IN (BLU)
MIC IN (PINK)
AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN)
PCI SLOT 2
Cable # 511
Cable # 500
TO IMAGE
MONITOR
D1
Cable # 510
TO COLOR
Cable # 501 PRINTER
D4
50F
SVGA
OUT 1
OPTIONAL 3 D CARD
PCI BIRD
RS232 (X4)
I2C
RS422
PSON
POK
TO POWER
SUPPLY
PC
ON/OFF
PATIENT
I/O
PS_ON
12C
RS232(X3)
SVGA OUT 2
S/C VIDEO OUT
PC POWER
PC ON/OFF
D2
PC POWER FOR INTERNAL I/O CIRCUITS
9-16-4
68M
PC
POWER
PC-VIC & PC2IO
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
PCI SLOT 6
SVGA IN
SCAN
CONVERT
Chapter 9
BEP2.0
2348186-4
BEP 2.0 with 3D option
USB6
USB5
USB4
USB3
PARALLEL
PORT
COM1
USB2
USB1
10/100bT
AGP VIDEO
NOT USED
AGP SLOT
C10
C11
C18
C12
C16
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
C20
C21
Cable # 534
C19
C18
Cable # 518
Cable # 519
Cable # 509
Cable # 529
Cable # 500
TO LCD
FLAT PANEL
Cable # 520
TO FRONT END
CARD RACK
SCB
Cable # 531
Cable # 508
See # 536
C5
OPTION KEY
C6
C3
C4
C17
C13
C9
50F
TO ANALOG
Cable # 501 COLOR PRINTER
TO IMAGE
MONITOR
Cable # 511
Cable # 500
D1
B7
B2
B1
B3
B8
B4
B9
B5
B6
12C to
RS232
12C
PORT
SVGA VIDEO
VIDEO
SWITCH
TRIGGER
COMP VIDEO
SVIDEO L
SVIDEO C
MIC EN
VCR AUDIO EN
MIC EN
TC ON SW1
Rack Power
SVIDEO L TO VCR
SVIDEO C TO VCR
SVIDEO L FROM VCR
SVIDEO C FROM VCR
SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT
SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT
COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT
SVIDEO L TO BW PRT
BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2
"Off Path"
"On Path"
TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE
INTERNAL I/O
VCR AUDIO EN
AUDIO TO OP PANEL
MIC FROM OP PANEL
PS_ON
12C
12C
RS232 #2
RS232 #1
USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL
TC ON SW1
A8
A9
A6
A7
12C
A10
A11
A1
A3
A2
A5
A4
TO
PRINTERS
SPARE
TO VCR
SVGA VIDEO
OUT
PHONE
USB
REMOTE EXP 2
REMOTE EXP 1
FOOTSWITCH
SERIAL
10/100bT
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
TRIGGER
VIDEO OUT
BW VIDEO OUT
SVIDEO OUT
Cable # 517B
Cable # 517A
AUDIO FROM VCR
AUDIO TO VCR
FROM MODEM
TO MODEM
Cable # 506
12C
PORT
EXTERNAL I/O
SVIDEO TO VCR
Cable # 516A
SVIDEO FROM VCR
Cable # 516B
Cable # 503
Cable # 502
Cable # 504
TO OP
PANEL
Cable # 500
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
2348186-3
BEP 2.0 without 3D option
SOUND CARD
AUDIO LINE IN (BLU)
MIC IN (PINK)
AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN)
PCI SLOT 1
Optional 3D Interface Card
PCI SLOT 2
PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS)
ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES
PCI SLOT 3
PCI SLOT 4
PC2IP
PC2IP
PCI SLOT 5
D3
D5
RGB
OUT
D2
D4
50F
SVGA
OUT 1
PS_ON
12C
RS232(X3)
SVGA OUT 2
S/C VIDEO OUT
NOT USED
UPS Control to the
BEP Power Supply
RS232 (X4)
I2C
RS422
PSON
POK
PC
ON/OFF
PATIENT
I/O
PC POWER
PC ON/OFF
Cable # 510
PC POWER FOR INTERNAL I/O CIRCUITS
9-16-4
68M
PC
POWER
PC-VIC & PC2IO
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Figure 9-25 BEP 2.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram
9-55
PCI SLOT 6
DVI IN
DVI to
Analog
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
AGP SLOT
Figure 9-26 BEP 2.1/2.2 and II/O Cabling Diagram
BEP2.1
2348186-14
BEP 2.1 with 3D option
2348186-13
BEP 2.1 without 3D option
USB6
USB5
USB4
USB3
PARALLEL
PORT
COM1
USB2
USB1
10/100bT
Cable # 520
TO FRONT END
CARD RACK
SCB
C21
C20
C19
Cable # 509
Cable # 533
TO DIGITAL
COLOR PRINTER
TO DIGITAL
B/W PRINTER
Cable # 532
NOT USED
Cable # 534
C18
Cable # 518
Cable # 519
Cable # 509
Cable # 500
TO IMAGE
MONITOR
Cable # 529
Cable # 500
TO LCD
FLAT PANEL
See # 536
C5
OPTION KEY
C6
C3
C4
C17
C13
C30
C9
C10
C11
C18
C12
C16
Cable # 531
Cable # 508A
B4
B9
B5
B6
B7
B2
B1
B3
B8
MIC TO BEP
12C to
RS232
PORT
12C
SVGA VIDEO
VIDEO
SWITCH
TRIGGER
COMP VIDEO
SVIDEO L
SVIDEO C
MIC EN
VCR AUDIO EN
MIC EN
TC ON SW1
Rack Power
SVIDEO L TO VCR
SVIDEO C TO VCR
SVIDEO L FROM VCR
SVIDEO C FROM VCR
SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT
SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT
COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT
SVIDEO L TO BW PRT
BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2
"Off Path"
"On Path"
TC ON SW1
TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE
INTERNAL I/O
VCR AUDIO EN
AUDIO TO OP PANEL
MIC FROM OP PANEL
PS_ON
12C
12C
RS232 #2
RS232 #1
USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL
PC POWER FOR INTERNAL I/O CIRCUITS
A8
A9
A6
A7
12C
A10
A11
A1
A3
A2
A5
A4
SPARE
TO VCR
Cable # 517B
AUDIO FROM VCR
AUDIO TO VCR
MODEM
(option)
PHONE
USB
REMOTE EXP 2
REMOTE EXP 1
FOOTSWITCH
SERIAL
10/100bT
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
TRIGGER
VIDEO OUT
BW VIDEO OUT
SVIDEO OUT
SVGA VIDEO
OUT
Cable # 517A
Cable # 506
w/ Modem
12C
PORT
EXTERNAL I/O
SVIDEO TO VCR
Cable # 516A
SVIDEO FROM VCR
Cable # 516B
Not used with
Digital Peripherals
Cable # 503 TO ANALOG
PRINTERS
Cable # 502
Cable # 504
TO OP
PANEL
Cable # 500
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
MOTHERBOARD AGP VIDEO -
ADD CARD - DIGITAL
VIDEO OUT
SOUND CARD
AUDIO LINE IN (BLU)
MIC IN (PINK)
AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN)
PCI SLOT 1
Optional 3D Interface Card
PCI SLOT 2
PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS)
ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES
PCI SLOT 3
PCI SLOT 4
PC2IP
PC2IP
PCI SLOT 5
D3
Cable # 511
Cable # 510
50M
TO ANALOG
Cable # 501 COLOR PRINTER
D5
RGB
OUT
D1
D4 Not Used
D2
SVGA
OUT 1
PS_ON
12C
RS232(X3)
SVGA OUT 2
S/C VIDEO OUT
PC POWER
PC ON/OFF
NOT USED
UPS Control to the
BEP Power Supply
RS232 (X4)
I2C
RS422
PSON
POK
PC
ON/OFF
PATIENT
I/O
PC
POWER
50M
68M
9-56
LINE IN TO BEP
9-16-4
LINE OUT FROM BEP
DG-VIC & DG2IO
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
BEP 3.x and BEP 4.x
ADVANCED (INPUT DEVICES)
See # 536
AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
PCI DIGITAL VIDEO
(LVDS BEP 4.1) or (DVI BEP 4.0)
9-16-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 9-27 BEP 3.x/BEP 4.x and II/O Cabling Diagram
Chapter 9
9-57
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-16-4
AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Table 9-30
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Internal I/O Cables
Part Name
Part
Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
2
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
N
1
-
1
1
-
1
From Front Panel to Front End Processor - #5
Not used on BT04
505
Doppler Cable
FB200793
From Modem to External I/O - #6
Packaged with FB200802-1 (modem power cable)
and used with Serial Modem Option kit
506
Standard Modem Cable
FB200794
BEP AGP Video to PCVIC Card SVGA - #8 - BEP-C13
to BEP-D3 - Same as Vivid 7 508
Monitor Cable Standard
FB200796
508A
Digital Video Interface Cable
2354056
Interface from AGP Slot ADD card to DGVIC
BEP 2.1 & BEP3
#9 - IIO-B7 to BEP-C6 or IIO-B8 to BEP-C7
Used with 2364642 in BEP 2.x Systems
509
RS232 Com 1/2 Cable
FB200797
- Same as Vivid 7 -
#10 - IIO-B6 to BEP-D2 - Same as Vivid 7 510
Internal I/O-PC2IO Power/
Control Cable
FB200798
511
Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals
Cable
FB200799
511A
Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals
Cable
FC200286
#11 - Obsolete Use FC200286-
#11A BEP D1 to IIO B5 Same as Vivid 7 Improved flex and length
511B
Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to
Male
FC200495
BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/ Internal I/O
FC200503
9-58
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-30
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Internal I/O Cables (Continued)
Item
Part Name
511C
Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to
Female
Part
Number
Description
2404419
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
2
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/internal
I/O FC200423 or FC200446
#18 - Same as Vivid 7 518
USB A-B Cable
070D2802
#19 - Same as Vivid 7 -
519
Ethernet Cat-5 Cable
070D2902
PCI Bus Extension Cable BEP to FEP - #20
- Same as Vivid 7 -
520
PCI Cable, AMP 974298
070M0016
#29 - IIO-B4 to BEP-AUD - Same as Vivid 7 529
Internal I/O-PC Audio Cable
FB200748
1
-
1
531
UPS Control Cable
FC200016
1
-
1
532
Digital B/W Printer Cable
1
-
1
1
-
1
From USB #6 to Digital B/W Printer - BEP 2.1
Straight USB, gray in color
2363062
533
Digital Color Printer Cable
From USB #5 to Digital Color Printer (USB to SCSI)
BEP 2.1, Right angle USB, black in color
Chapter 9
9-59
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Table 9-30
Item
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Internal I/O Cables (Continued)
Part Name
Part
Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
N
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
From USB #3 To Serial Cable To Internal I/O B7 Obsolete
Use 2364642 and FB200797
534
USB to Serial Adapter Cable
2348186-26
From USB #3 To Serial Cable FB200797 To Internal I/O
B7 (Ext I/O Com Port)
BEP 2.0 & 2.1 & BEP3
534A
USB to Serial Adapter Cable
2364642
535
USB to SCSI Adapter
2354406
From USB to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input
Parallel port hasp to BEP for Options
536
9-60
Option Key
2320432
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-17
Power Distribution Modules
609
608 608A
604A
604
603
603A
601
602
Figure 9-28 Power Distribution
Table 9-31
Power Distribution
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
FRU
601
Card Rack Power Supply PWA
Assembly (FEPS)
See Item 409
Power Supplies are mounted on the circuit board
1
1
602
AC Transformer Assembly
FB200581
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
2
603
AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V
FC200079
- Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515
1
N
603A
AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V
2399515
100-120 VAC Systems
1
1
604
AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V
FC200081
- Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515-2
1
N
604A
AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V
2399515-2
220-240 VAC Systems
1
1
608
FEP AC Line Filter & Cable
2315960
Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter
and Power Harness
Obsolete, use 2375555
1
N
608A
FEP AC Line Filter
2375555
1
1
609
ACC CLAMP
068E4000
1
1
AC Controller Clamp
- Same As Vivid 7-
Chapter 9
9-61
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-18
Air Distribution
652
652
653
651
Figure 9-29 Air Distribution Parts
Table 9-32
Item
Part Name
Air Distribution Parts
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
651
Fan Assembly
FB200580
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
-
1
652
Air Intake Cover
FB307379
Replaced by FC307778
1
-
1
652
Air Intake Cover
FC307778
Replaces FB307379
1
-
1
653
Filter
FB307903
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
Y
1
9-62
Section 9-18 - Air Distribution
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-19
Voice Scan
760
750 756 757 764
765
770
766
765A
768
761
772
761A
762
763
769
773
767
767A
750A
755
Figure 9-30 Voice Scan Replacement Parts
Chapter 9
9-63
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-19
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Voice Scan (cont’d)
Table 9-33
Voice Scan
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
750
Wireless Receiver
2383770
Obsolete - use 5115162 Must also order 5115164
1
Y
N
750A
Wireless Receiver
5115162
wireless receiver generation 2
1
-
1
755
Tray for Wireless Receiver
2377599
1
-
2
756
Foam - Wireless Receiver
Bottom
2377600
1
-
2
757
Foam - Wireless Receiver Top
2377601
1
-
2
760
Battery Charger
2383775
1
Y
1
761
Battery - 9V NiMH
2383776
1
-
N
761A
Battery - 9V NiMH
5121291
Green 9V Rechargeable Battery
1
Y
1
762
Wireless Microphone
2383779
Over the ear style.
1
Y
1
763
Wired USB Headset
2386172
Obsolete - use 5159489
1
-
N
764
Wireless Microphone Care Kit
2386142
wind screens, clip, and cable only
1
-
1
765
Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless
2383773
Obsolete - use 5116453 Must also order 5115236
1
-
N
765A
Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless
5116453
wireless transmitter generation 2
(with charging contacts)
1
Y
1
766
Adapter Kit - 240Vac
2390117
1
-
1
767
AC power adapter, US
5116448
For 5116446 only
1
-
1
767A
AC power adapter, foreign
5116450
For 5116446 only
1
-
1
768
Rechargeable Battery Pack for
Transmitter
5116454
1
Y
1
769
Battery recharger station
5116446
1
-
1
770
Antenna
5115891
For 2383770 and 2383773 only
1
-
N
772
Rechargeable AA Batteries
5115236
rechargeable AA batteries (pack of 4) for generation 2
transmitter
1
Y
1
773
Wired Headset
5159489
Andrea VS Headset
1
Y
1
9-64
Yellow 9V Rechargeable Battery
Obsolete - use 5121291
For 2383775 only
For 120V order 2383775
Section 9-19 - Voice Scan
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
9-19-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Voice Scan Cabling
WIRELESS MIC OPTION
AC
Distribution
Box
2383769
or
5115164
2384314
NOTE:
BT04 has AC
Distribution
Cable
2383767
AC
Adapter
754
751 751B Wireless Mic
758
USB Audio
Adapter
759
AF OUT
MIC IN
C19
AUDIO OUT
2384449
Receiver
2XXXXX
2383768
753
NOT USED
BEP
2383765
752
Figure 9-31 Wireless Interconnect
Table 9-34
Wireless Interconnect
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
751
Battery Eliminator Cable
2383769
For use with 2383770
1
-
1
751B
Dummy AA Battery Power
Supply
5115164
dummy AA battery power supply for wireless
receiver generation 2
1
-
1
752
Audio to USB Adapter
2383765
1
-
1
753
Audio Cable from Receiver
2383768
1
-
1
754
Power Cable for Receiver
2383767
1
-
1
758
AC Adapter - 9V, 1.1A
2384314
1
-
1
759
USB Extension Cable
2384449
1
-
1
Chapter 9
9-65
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-20
4D Components
800 800A
805
803 804
802
801
Figure 9-32 4D Components
Table 9-35
4 D Parts
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
800
4D Motor Controller
2372904
BT06 systems and prior
1
-
1
800A
4D Motor Controller
5180588
BT07 and later systems, or systems upgraded to BT07
or BT09, only
1
-
1
801
Cable, Bracket to Probe
2384183
1
Y
1
802
Cable, Motor Controller/Bracket
assembly
2375551
1
-
1
803
Cable, Motor Controller to IIO
2375552
1
-
1
804
Cable, USB to Motor Controller
2353228
1
-
1
805
Cable, Motor Controller Power
2375553
1
-
1
9-66
Section 9-20 - 4D Components
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-21
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components
820
Figure 9-33 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components
Table 9-36
Continuous Wave Doppler Components
Item
Part Name
Part Number
820
CW Card
2380188
CW Cable
2380188-13
Mu Metal Shield
2380188-11
Description
inserts under BEP for noise reduction
Chapter 9
Qty
CRU
FRU
1
-
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
9-67
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-22
Peripherals
Table 9-37
Approved Peripherals
Part Name
Part Number
Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
Sony VCR 9500 M2D
2117635
(T3306ER)
H4700TC - NTSC
Obsolete - order 5122171
1
-
N
H45001PA - PAL Version (Europe)
Obsolete - order 5122172
1
-
N
Sony VCR 9500 MDP2
Sony 2900 Color Video Printer
2207254
(T3306PT)
H4700TD
1
-
2
Sony Color Printer UP51MDU
2281966
Analog (large footprint) H4700TH
1
-
2
Sony B/W Video Printer
UP895MD
2288502
Analog E8210B
1
-
2
3 Position Footswitch
FB200723
- Same as Vivid 7 -
1
Y
2
Sony UP-D895MD
2358588
Digital B/W Printer
Obsolete - order 5171608
1
-
2
Sony UP-D897MD
5171608
1
-
1
Sony UP-D50MD
2358596
Digital Color Printer
Obsolete - crosses up to 5116559
1
-
1
Sony UP-D21MD
2358449
Digital Color Printer (small footprint)
Obsolete - crosses up to 2401985
1
-
-
Sony UP-21MD
2351318
Analog Color Printer (small footprint)
1
-
-
Sony UP-D23MD
2401985
Digital, A6 (small footprint)
-
-
Sony UP-21 & D21 &
UP-D23MD Adapter kit
2351082
Mounting plate, cover tray and screws
-
-
HP6122
2378741
Deskjet Printer
Y
-
Sony UP-D55MD
5116559
Digital, Replaces 2358596.
If replacing 2358596, also order 5123707 Adapter Kit
-
-
HP-6540
5121837
1
-
-
HP-5650
5121839
1
-
-
UP-D55 Adapter Kit
5123707
-
-
Mitsubushi NTSC VCR
5122171
for USA NTSC with RS232C-USB
-
-
Mitsubushi PAL VCR
5122172
for Europe PAL with RS232C-USB
-
-
DVR Video Recorder
5120592
Panasonic LQ-MD800P DVR Video Recorder
BT07 and later only
1
-
1
Cable, USB Right-Angle
5181607
USB A to B for DVR
1
-
1
Canon Pixma MP610 External
Printer
KTZ2300182
Offline Report/Image Color Printer
1
-
1
Canon Pixma MP610 External
Printer Cable
5315370
Cable for Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer
1
-
1
9-68
Replaces Sony UP-D895MD (2358588)
Part includes drivers for earlier BTs
1
Includes: FC307635 plastic cover/tray,
46-312358P36 M4 screws and 068X0200 long strap
Section 9-22 - Peripherals
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-23
Customer Documentation
Table 9-38
User Documentation
BT02
Part Number
BT03
Part Number
BT04
Part Number
BT06
Part Number
BT07
Part Number
BT09
Part Number
FRU
Basic User
Manual (BUM)
2309819-100
2384455-100
5113776-100
5140804-100
5174158-100
5338262-100
N
ARM
2309835-100
2384454-100
5113777-100
5140805-100
5173359-100
5338271-100
N
QG
2309820-100
2384458-100
5113779-100
5140807-100
5173872-100
N/A
N
RN
2320595-100
2384452-100
5113780-100
5140811-100
5174065-100
5338272-100
N
eDocs
2384456-200
5113783-200
5140813-200
5173842-200
5338273-100
N
Kit
2392066
5113787-1
5140830-1
5173499-1
5338275-1
N
2384457-100
5113784-100
5140808-100
5173599-100
5173599-100
N
QC2
5113785-100
5140809-100
5173473-100
5173473-100
N
QC3
5113786-100
5140810-100
5174064-100
5174064-100
N
Description
QC1
2309821-100
AIUM
2163920-100
2163920-100
2163920-100
2163920-100
2163920-100
2163920-100
N
Install
22361715-100
22361715-100
22361715-100
22361715-100
22361715-100
22361715-100
N
UG
2388578-100
5113778-100
5140812-100
5174247-100
5338270-100
N
Add
2389047-100
5113781-100
N/A
N/A
N/A
N
OLH
2384453-100
5113782-300
5140806-100
5174102-100
5338264-100
N
2294853-100
2294853-100
2294853-100
2294853-100
2294853-100
N
2399069-100
2399069-100
2399069-100
Service
Install Cklist
2294853-100
Chapter 9
N
9-69
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 9-24
Probes
901
902
903
907
908
909
906
905 924
904
912
911
910
914
913
921
917
916
915
923
918
920
919
Figure 9-34 LOGIQ™ 9 Probes
9-70
Section 9-24 - Probes
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-24
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Probes (cont’d)
Table 9-39
Available Probes
Item
Part Name
Part Number
Description
901
3.5C
2050357
902
M7C
903
CRU
FRU
H4901PE - PDI
Y
1
2294514
H40412LC
Y
1
E8C
2294641
H40412LE
Y
1
904
7L
2294521
H40412LF
Y
1
905
10L
2294523
H40412LG
Y
1
906
M12L
2294511
H40412LD
Y
1
907
i12L
2264883
H4012L
Y
1
908
4S
2295658
H4901PB - PDI
Y
1
909
10S
2298589
H4901PC - PDI
Y
1
910
8C
2348094
H40412LJ
Y
1
911
TCD 3S
2323337
H4701SZ - PDI
Y
1
912
3.5CS
2051858
H40412LK
Y
1
913
Probe Latching Mechanism
2363861
-
1
914
4C Probe
5123455
Kit includes
Probe 2401359, ICD card and shipping carton
Y
1
915
4D3C-L Probe
KTZ195893
(KTI195894)
H44801G
Y
1
916
4D10L Probe
KTZ156836
(KTI156837)
H44801GB
Y
1
917
4DE7C Probe
KTZ195859
(KTI195860)
H44801GA
Y
1
918
CW 5 MHz Probe
2380188-5
Non-imaging Doppler Probe
Y
1
919
CW 8 MHz Probe
2380188-8
Non-imaging Doppler Probe
Y
1
4D8C
KTZ156959
H44801GZ
Y
1
920
t739L
2259246
H40212LM
Y
1
921
i739L
2259206
H40212LF
Y
1
923
4D16L
KTZ156972
H44801GY
Y
1
924
9L
5149427
H40412LT
Y
1
M7C Tru3D Sensor Bracket
2325300
-
-
M12L Tru3D Sensor Bracket
2325301
-
-
4S Tru3D Sensor Bracket
2325302
-
-
E8C Tru3D Sensor Bracket
2325303
-
-
10L Tru3D Sensor Bracket
2325304
-
-
Large round blue locking knob used on some probes
L3, L5, L7, V3, V4, V7
Qty
H4904PC
Chapter 9
9-71
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
P
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
A R TOYGE
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Section 9-24
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Probes (cont’d)
Table 9-40
Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix
Item
Part Name
Part Number
2.x
3.x
4.x
6.x
7.x/9.x
901
3.5C
2050357
x
x
x
x
x
902
M7C
2294514
x
x
x
x
x
903
E8C
2294641
x
x
x
x
x
904
7L
2294521
x
x
x
x
x
905
10L
2294523
x
x
x
x
x
906
M12L
2294511
x
x
x
x
x
907
i12L
2264883
x
x
x
x
x
908
4S
2295658
x
x
x
x
x
909
10S
2298589
x
x
x
x
x
910
8C
2348094
NA
x
x
x
x
911
TCD 3S
2323337
NA
x
x
x
x
912
3.5CS
2051858
NA
x
x
x
x
914
4C Probe
5123455
NA
NA
x
x
x
915
4D3C-L Probe
KTZ195893
(KTI195894)
NA
NA
x
x
x
916
4D10L Probe
KTZ156836
(KTI156837)
NA
NA
x
x
x
917
4DE7C Probe
KTZ195859
(KTI195860)
NA
NA
x
x
x
918
CW 5 MHz Probe
2380188-5
NA
NA
x
x
x
919
CW 8 MHz Probe
2380188-8
NA
NA
x
x
x
4D8C
KTZ156959
NA
NA
NA
x
x
920
t739L
2259246
NA
NA
NA
x
x
921
i739L
2259206
NA
NA
NA
x
x
923
4D16L
KTZ156972
NA
NA
NA
x
x
924
9L
5149427
NA
NA
NA
x
x
9-72
Section 9-24 - Probes
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10
Care & Maintenance
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ™ 9 system does not have any high wear
components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some
Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different
frequency than listed in this manual.
10-1-2
Purpose of Chapter 10
This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are
intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter
completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.
Table 10-1
Contents in Chapter 10
Section
Description
Page Number
10-1
Overview
10-1
10-2
Why do Maintenance
10-2
10-3
Maintenance Task Schedule
10-2
10-4
Tools Required
10-4
10-5
System Maintenance
10-5
10-6
Using a Phantom
10-10
10-7
Electrical Safety Tests
10-11
10-8
When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
10-27
ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
10-28
Site Log
10-29
10-9
CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and
even when disconnecting/connecting cables.
DANGER
THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION,
AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT
THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS
STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-1
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System
performance and cooling require this.
Section 10-2
Why do Maintenance
10-2-1
Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective
maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on page 10-28) provides the customer
with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room
or near the scanner.
10-2-2
Quality Assurance
In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it
is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The
program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate
designee.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period
so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and
maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for
a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
Section 10-3
Maintenance Task Schedule
10-3-1
How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?
The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ™ 9
should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
NOTE:
It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ 9 care & maintenance is performed
as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ™ 9 ultrasound scanning
system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information
and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule
assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ 9 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a
primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
NOTE:
10-2
If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to
increase the maintenance frequencies.
Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (cont’d)
Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule
Service at Indicated Time
Daily
Per Facilities
Weekly Monthly QA Program
•*
•
Clean Probes
Clean Probe Holders
* or before each use
more frequently depending on
your environment
•
Clean Air Filter
Notes
Clean Monitor and Touch Panel
•
•
•
•
Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and
Swivel Locks
•
Mobile Unit Check Daily
Check Control Panel Movement
•
Mobile Unit Check Daily
Inspect AC Mains Cable
Inspect Cables and Connectors
Clean Console
Mobile Unit Check Weekly
Console Leakage Current Checks
•
also after corrective
maintenance
Peripheral Leakage Current Checks
•
also after corrective
maintenance
Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks
•
also after corrective
maintenance
•
also after corrective
maintenance
•
also after corrective
maintenance
•
also after corrective
maintenance
Measurement Accuracy Checks
•
also after corrective
maintenance
Probe/Phantom Checks
•
also after corrective
maintenance
Functional Checks
•
also after corrective
maintenance
Endocavity Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Transesphongeal Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Surgical Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-3
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 10-4
Tools Required
10-4-1
10-4-1-1
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment
Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Table 10-3
Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Tool
Part Number
Comments
46–194427P231
46–194427P279
Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240
V system
46–194427P369
3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap
46–194427P373
3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap
46–194427P370
3M #3051 conductive ground cord
46–194427P278
120V
46–194427P279
230V
Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
Anti Static Kit
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner
Air Filter
Section 9-18
air intake
Safety Analyzer
46–285652G1
DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests
SVHS VCR Cassette
E7010GG
60 minute
E7010GF
120 minute
SVHS VCR Head Cleaner
See VCR user manual for requirements
DVD-R
See DVR user manual for requirements
DVD-RAM
3.5” MOD MEDIA
E8381AA
blank 128 M disk
E8381AB
blank 230 M disk
2117811
cleans the diskettes
5.25” MOD Media
3.5” MOD Media Cleaner
5.25” MOD Media Cleaner
cleans the diskettes
3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit
2148392
5.25” MOD Head Cleaner Kit
cleans the drive heads
cleans the drive heads
QIQ Phantom
E8370RB
CD-RW Media
RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS
Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive
Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality
Assurance Program tests.
For LOGIQ™ 9
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet
See printer user manual for requirements
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet
See printer user manual for requirements
Disposable Gloves
Cut/Chemical Resistant Gloves
Ergonomic kneel pad
10-4
5140706
Section 10-4 - Tools Required
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 10-5
System Maintenance
10-5-1
Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
Table 10-4
System Checks
Step
Item
Description
1
Ask & Listen
Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
2
Paperwork
Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see page 28). Note all probes and system
options.
3
Power up
Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during
power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
4
Probes
Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.
5
Displays
Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel.
6
Presets
Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-5
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-5-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4)
The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1
System Checks
Table 10-5
Check
System Functional Checks
Step
Description
B-Mode
Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode
of operation.
CF-Mode
Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that
affect this mode of operation.
Doppler Modes
Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls
that affect this mode of operation.
M-Mode
Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of
operation.
*Applicable Software
Options
Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast,
Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each
options operation.
Xmit/Recv Elements
Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels
are functional.
Keyboard Test
Monitor
NOTE:
10-6
Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.
Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.
Touch Panel
Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.
Measurements
Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area
calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy
specifications.
Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may
use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
* Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.
Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-5-2-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Peripheral/Option Checks
If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer
to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.
Table 10-6
10-5-3
10-5-3-1
GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks
Step
Item
Description
1
VCR
Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
2
DVR
Verify record/playback capabilities of the DVR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3
B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4
Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
5
DICOM
6
InSite
7
Camera
Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary.
8
Footswitch
Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
9
ECG
Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications.
(Warranty & Contract Customers only)
Verify basic operation with customer
Input Power
Mains Cable Inspection
Table 10-7
Step
1
Mains Cable Inspection
Item
Description
Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.
2
Inspect
Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.
3
Verify
Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no
strands may cause a short circuit.
4
Verify
Inlet connector retainer is functional.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-7
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-5-4
10-5-4-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Cleaning
General Cleaning
Table 10-8
General Cleaning
Step
Item
Description
1
Console
Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful
not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.
2
Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
Only use the following cleaners on the LOGIQ™ 9 Operator Panel:
• Palmolive Dishwashing Liquid (manufactured by Colgate-Palmolive)
• Sani Wipes (manufactured by Microgen Inc.)
3
Op Panel
• Tspray 2 (manufactured by Pharmaceutical Innovations, Inc.)
DO NOT use original formula Tspray (Tspray 1) on the operator panel. Only Tspray 2 is acceptable.
NOTE:Since various lotions can have a long term negative impact on the operator panel, hands
should be clean and free of lotion.
To clean the monitor face:
• Use a soft, folded cloth. Gently wipe the monitor face.
4
CRT
• Do NOT use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl
Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with the filter (anti-glare shield). Hard rubbing will also damage the filter.
• When cleaning the monitor, make sure not to scratch the monitor.
Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol (ethanol, methanol, or isopropyl alcohol), abrasive cleaners, or other
strong solvents, as these may cause damage to the cabinet or LCD panel.
5
DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as pencils or pens, as this may result
in damage to the panel.
LCD
To clean LCD panel:
• The LCD surface can be cleaned with a soft cloth, such as cotton or lens paper.
• If necessary, stubborn stains can be removed by moistening part of a cloth with water to enhance its
cleaning power.
10-5-4-2
Air Filter Cleaning
Table 10-9
NOTE:
10-8
Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment
Step
Item
Description
1
Remove Filter
Cover
Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions.
2
Clean Filter
The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter
is metal, wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic, vacuum or replace.
3
Install Filter
Install the clean filter.
For your convenience or if the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. Refer to
Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number.
Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-5-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Physical Inspection
Table 10-10 Physical Checks
Step
Item
1
Labeling
2
10-5-6
Description
Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 User
Manual for details.
Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.
3
Control Panel
Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.
4
Control Panel
Movement
Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that
it latches in position as required.
5
Wheels & Brakes
Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving,
and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation.
6
Cables &
Connectors
Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay
special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Also check the wires
connecting the side-fan on the BEP cover to the 4-PIN to make sure the wires are not pinched or
damaged.
7
Shielding &
Covers
Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
8
External I/O
Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
9
Op Panel Lights
Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.
10
Monitor Light
Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.
11
External
Microphone
Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test.
Optional Diagnostic Checks
Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs
and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-6-1
View the Logs
1.) Review the system error log for any problems.
2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-9
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-5-7
10-5-7-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Probe Maintenance
Probe Related Checks
Table 10-11 Probe Related Checks
10-5-7-2
Step
Item
1
Probe Holder
2
Probes
Description
Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets
if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins
Basic Probe Care
The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe
care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper
care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care
cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment
damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.
Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.
TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals.
For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.
10-5-7-3
Basic Probe Cleaning
Refer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning.
NOTE:
To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made
of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
NOTE:
Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s
warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing
so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the
probe.
NOTE:
Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
Section 10-6
Using a Phantom
See the Basic User Manual “Customer Maintenance” for information on using a phantom and quality
assurance tests.
NOTE:
10-10
The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as
part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 10-7
Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-1
Safety Test Overview
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC
60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of
cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer
to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.
WARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT
LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT
SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO
PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be
contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures
before handling the equipment.
Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause
injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and
a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.
To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should:
•
Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way
•
Check probe leakage current:
*
Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes
*
Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes
*
whenever probe damage is suspected
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-11
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9
The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA), IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety
Standards, and IEC 62353 Medical Electrical Equipment — Recurrent test and test after repair of
medical electrical equipment. Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety
Standards, Table IV.
Table 10-12 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces
Country
Normal Condition
Open Ground
Open Neutral
USA
0.1 mA
0.3 mA*
0.3 mA
Other
0.1 mA
0.5 mA
0.5 mA
Table 10-13 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface
and Cavity Probes
All Countries
Normal Condition
Open Ground
Open Neutral
AC
0.1 mA
0.5 mA
0.5 mA
DC**
0.01 mA
0.05 mA
0.05 mA
Table 10-14 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG
Connections
Country
Normal Condition
Open Ground
Open Neutral
USA
0.01 mA
0.05mA
0.05 mA
Other
0.01 mA
0.05 mA
0.05 mA
Table 10-15 ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) Limits***
NOTE:
Probe Type
Measurement
BF
5 mA
CF
0.05 mA
*Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table 19.5DV.1
**Most meters (like Dale 600/601) measure a composite of the AC and DC leakage current.
***ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) refer to the sink leakage test where
mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass
(or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.
10-12
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada
Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet
tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported
to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester
NOTE:
No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the
Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this
should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-13
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Grounding Continuity
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case.
The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1.
Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test
10-7-4-1
Meter Procedure
Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.
1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF.
2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.
4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position.
5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position.
6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.
10-14
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-5
10-7-5-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chassis Leakage Current Test
Definition
This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal
parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power
line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground.
Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and
Reversed. Record the highest reading.
.
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY
switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-15
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-5-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Generic Procedure
The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from
accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF,
with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.
Figure 10-3 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current,
IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and
Patient, Auxiliary Currents
When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall
outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places
the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated
in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in
Table 10-12.
7.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-16.
Table 10-16 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition
TEST
CONDITION
1
Mounting screw for probe receptacle
2
caster support
3
Mounting screw for CRT housing
4
Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit
5
Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit
8.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data kept on site.
10-16
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-5-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-12. Record all data
on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-17 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
Unit Power
Tester Polarity
Switch
Tester Neutral
Test 1
or Ground
Probe
Switch
Connector
Test 2
caster
Test 3
CRT
Optional
Test 4
Optional
Test 5
Enter Name of tested peripheral here:
10-7-6
10-7-6-1
ON
NORM
OPEN
ON
NORM
CLOSED
ON
REV
OPEN
ON
REV
CLOSED
OFF
NORM
OPEN
OFF
NORM
CLOSED
OFF
REV
OPEN
OFF
REV
CLOSED
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground
Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The
meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching
some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with
power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each
combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case
condition.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure
to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise,
the unit may be damaged.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-17
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-6-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Generic Procedure
Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and
reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead
switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.
The connection is at service entrance
or on the supply side of a separately
derived system
Appliance power switch
(use both "off" and "on" positions)
Patient lead selector switch (if any)
(activated as required)
Polarity reversing switch
(use both positions)
Patient connected leads
Appliance
H (Black)
H
POWER
OUTLET
N
N (White)
Internal
circuitry
G
Between each patient
lead and ground
G (Green)
Insulating surface
Building
ground
Grounding contact switch (use in both
"open" and "closed" positions)
Current meter
H = Hot
N = Neutral (grounded)
G = Grounding conductor
Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated
Patient Leads
Table 10-18 Testing Power Conditions
10-18
ECG Power
Meter’s Polarity Switch
Meter’s Neutral Switch
ON
NORM
CLOSED
ON
NORM
OPEN
ON
REVERSE
CLOSED
ON
REVERSE
OPEN
OFF
NORM
CLOSED
OFF
NORM
OPEN
OFF
REVERSE
CLOSED
OFF
REVERSE
OPEN
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-7
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead
Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function
selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL)
on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the
highest leakage current measured.
10-7-8
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test
Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function
selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to
ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in
previous tests.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-19
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-8-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all
data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
Maximum
Allowance Limit
Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test
AC Power
Source
GROUND OPEN
GROUND
CLOSED
115V
10uA
10uA
220/240V
500uA
10uA
and
Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test
Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
AC Power
Source
Maximum
Allowance Limit
115V
20uA
220/240V
5mA
Patient Lead Isolation Current Test
Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
10-20
ECG
Power
Tester
Polarity
Switch
Tester
Ground
Switch
ON
NORM
CLOSED
ON
REVERSE
CLOSED
ON
NORM
OPEN
ON
REVERSE
OPEN
OFF
NORM
CLOSED
OFF
REVERSE
CLOSED
OFF
NORM
OPEN
OFF
REVERSE
OPEN
Tester Lead Selector
RL
RA
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
LA
LL
C
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-9
10-7-9-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Probe Leakage Current Test
Definition
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who
is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
NOTE:
Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe
leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line
voltage and test lead placement.
It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the
configuration of the test equipment.
10-7-9-2
Test Equipment
Table 10-22 Test Equipment kits (Chapter 10 LOGIQ™ 9 Proprietary Service Manual)
Kit
Description
Contents
46-285652G1
Dale 601 ULTRASOUND SAFETY
ANALYZER FIELD KIT
for 120V unit
• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601 for 120V unit
• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/102 6FT SALINE BATH GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER
• Vendor MODEL 600/600 SOFT CARRYING CASE
• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL
• Vendor MODEL 600/901 LMINATED OPERATORS GUIDE
46-328406G2
Dale 601E ULTRASOUND SAFETY
ANALYZER FIELD KIT
for 220V unit
• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601E for 220V unit
• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/101 16FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
• Vendor MODEL 600/103 8FT CHASSIS GROUND PROBE
• Vendor MODEL 600/200 8FT EXTERNAL LEAKAGE GROUND CABLE
• #20 WIRE W/MINIGATOR CLIPS, 2 Ft
• CARRYING CASE and foam padding
• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL
2113015
ULTRASOUND PROBE
LEAKAGE ADAPTER KIT
• LOGIQ FAMILY PROBE ADAPTER
• Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER
• Vendor MODEL 600/203 RADIUS/SONOCHROME PROBE LEAKAGE
CURRENT ADAPTER
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-21
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-9-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Test Equipment (cont’d)
Table 10-23 Test Equipment and Accessory Description
Dale Part number
Vendor MODEL
600/100
46-285647P2
Accessory Name
Picture
Description
Used on DALE601/601E to measure
earth resistance and enclosure
leakage current. Also used as
reference lead for external
measurement.
CHASSIS CABLE
Black coil cord with extended
length and black grips.
Vendor MODEL
600/102
46-285647P4
Also referred to as “Saline Probe” or
“Saline Bath Ground Cable”.
Measures earth resistance and
enclosure leakage current. Also used
for grounding saline baths for
isolation testing of probes.
CHASSIS GROUND PROBE
Used on DALE601/601E. This probe
may be substituted for the 600/100
Chassis
Cable, and used as a probe
Black coil cord with needle probe
instead of a clamp.
for testing receptacles and for
tight spaces.
Standard auxiliary cable for external
measurements of leakage current
and voltage gradient between two
surfaces.
Vendor MODEL
600/200
Used on DALE601/601E to measure:
ISO/EXTERNAL LEAKAGE
CABLE
• Point-to-Point Leakage Current
• Probe and Transducer Isolation
Current
46-285647P6
May only be connected to the female
connector of the Analyzer, labeled
Black coiled cord with red grips.
EXTERNAL
Vendor MODEL
600/202
ULTRASOUND LOGIQ FAMILY
ADAPTER
2107545-2
10-22
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
Use during M.A.P. or Isolation test
(see Chapter 10 - Meter procedure
using probe adapter)
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-9-3
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Generic procedure on Leakage Current
Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line mains polarity normal,
and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case
condition.
SALINE
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
10-7-9-4
Meter procedure using probe adapter
The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the
test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free
ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of
table salt, mixed thoroughly.
Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current:
1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF.
2.) Plug the unit’s mains power cord into the test meter, and plug the test meter into the tested AC wall
outlet.
3.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's “CHASSIS” connector.
4.) Set the test meter's “FUNCTION” switch to “CHASSIS” (Dale 600) or "ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE"
(Dale 601).
5.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.
6.) Put the saline probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath.
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid
beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid
or any part of the unit under test while the LIFT GROUND switch is depressed.
7.) Power ON the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.
8.) After the LOGIQ™ 9 unit has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested so it is the
active probe.
9.) Depress the LIFT GROUND rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-24 for every probe.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-13 and
Table 10-14.
11.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data using Table 10-24.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-23
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-9-4
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Meter procedure using probe adapter (cont’d)
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the
Ultrasound unit is powered on.
Power off
P
Power off the Ultrasound unit, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit
breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch on the leakage
meter to avoid possible power supply damage.
Table 10-24 Typical Data Sheet For Probe Source Leakage Current
Probe Tested:
Unit Power
Tester Power Polarity
Switch
Tester NEUTRAL
Switch
Tester GROUND
Switch
Measurement
Start with System Powered OFF
OFF
NORMAL
OPEN
CLOSED
OFF
NORMAL
OPEN
OPEN
OFF
NORMAL
CLOSED
CLOSED
OFF
NORMAL
CLOSED
OPEN
Open Neutral first, then attempt Power ON
ON
NORMAL
OPEN
CLOSED
ON
NORMAL
OPEN
OPEN
Close Neutral. Power System ON, and wait until Probe under test is active, before continuing
10-24
ON
NORMAL
CLOSED
CLOSED
ON
NORMAL
CLOSED
OPEN
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-7-9-5
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current
The Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter
utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins.
The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the
test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free
ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of
table salt, mixed thoroughly.
Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current.
1.) Plug the test meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
2.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe in diagram) into the test meter's “CHASSIS”
connector.
3.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter.
4.) Plug the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter into the test meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”.
Figure 10-6 Probe Isolation (Sink) Current Test
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-25
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-7-9-5Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current (cont’d)
5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL (DALE 600) or Mains on Applied Parts (M.A.P.)
(DALE 601) position.
6.) Put the Chassis Ground Probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the
saline bath.
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid
beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid
or any part of the unit under test while the ISO Test/MAP switch is depressed.
7.) Depress the ISO TEST (DALE 600) or M.A.P. (DALE 601) ROCKER SWITCH and record the
highest current reading.
8.) Test every probe and record in Table 10-25 the test results for every probe.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the values in Table 10-15.
9.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data.
.
Table 10-25 Probes Tested for Isolation (Sink) Current
Probe Tested
10-26
Measurement with ISO/Mains Applied
Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 10-8
When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
CHASSIS FAILS
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed,
or intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or
owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used
instead.
NOTE:
No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding
wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a
possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
PROBE FAILS
Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
NOTE:
Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from
differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for
body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe
type in the appropriate space on the check list.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor
connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
PERIPHERAL FAILS
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
STILL FAILS
If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones,
one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
NEW UNIT
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit
a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
ECG FAILS
Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
10-27
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
10-8-1
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Electrical Test Performed
Max Value
Allowed
Value
Measured
OK?
Comments
OK?
Comments
Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)
System Ground Continuity
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster
Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT
Patient Lead Source Leakage
(Lead to Ground)
Patient Lead Source Leakage
(Lead to Lead)
Patient Lead Source Leakage
(Isolation)
Peripheral 1 Leakage Current
Peripheral 1Ground Continuity
Peripheral 2 Leakage Current
Peripheral 2Ground Continuity
Peripheral 3 Leakage Current
Peripheral 3Ground Continuity
PROBES
Probe Number
(from previous page)
Max Value
Allowed
Max Value
Measured
Probe 1:
Probe 2:
Probe 3:
Probe 4:
Probe 5:
Probe 6:
Probe 7:
Probe 8:
Probe 9:
Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.
Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________
10-28
Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Section 10-9
Site Log
Table 10-26 Site Log
Date
Service person
Problem
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance
Comments
10-29
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
CHAPTER10.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table 10-26 Site Log (Continued)
Date
10-30
Service person
Problem
Section 10-9 - Site Log
Comments
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_IX.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
INDEX
Numerics
3-D Externals, 9-34
A
AC Power PWB, 5-72
Acoustic Noise Output, 3-11
Acquisition Diagnostics, 7-19
Adjustment
Z-Release Cable, 6-8
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card, 5-35,
5-40
Air Flow Control, 5-79
Air Flow Distribution, 5-79
Application Software
Upgrading, 8-49, 8-61
Application Software Load, 8-44
Automatic Troubleshooting, 7-19
B
B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board, 5-18
B/M-Mode Checks
Functional Checks, 4-14
Back End Processor, 5-22, , 5-27, 5-34, 5-39
BEP3, 5-34, , 5-39
Inputs, 5-25
Outputs, 5-26
Theory, 5-22, 5-27, 5-34, 5-39
Backup
Media, 8-18
Patient Database, 4-22
Preset Configurations, 4-22
Basic Measurements
Functional Checks, 4-16
Battery, 8-12, , 8-16
BEP, 8-7, 8-10, 8-13
Battery Pack Replacement, 8-4
Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41
Power Off Path, 5-45
Power On, 5-44
Power On Path, 5-44
BEP3
Inputs, 5-37, 5-42
Outputs, 5-38, 5-43
Block Diagram
Simple System, 5-5
BMP Board
General Description, 5-18
Boot Up, 3-8, 4-6
Brake
Adjustment, 6-15
Brake Arm
Adjustment, 6-13
Brake Pedal
warning, 3-2
Brakes
Functional Checks, 4-28
C
Calibration Utilities, 7-23
CD-ROM
Handling Tips, 8-18
Media Requirements, 8-18
CE Compliance, 1-22
CFM and PWD Modes
Functional Checks, 4-15
Common Diagnostics, 7-30
Configuration, 5-88
Connecting USB Line Printer, 3-24
Connectivity
Settings, 8-17
Worksheet, 3-22
Console Lock Assembly Replacement, 8-70
Console Weight, 3-11
Contact Information, 1-23
Control Panel, 4-3
Customer Assistance, 1-23
D
Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-18
Diagnostics, 5-86, , 7-18
Acquisition, 7-19
Common, 7-30
Direction Lock
Functional Checks, 4-28
Disposal, 8-12, 8-16
DVD Media Requirements, 8-18
E
EBM Board, 5-19
Electrical
requirements, 2-2
Safety, 1-17
Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-22
EMI Protection, 3-7
Index
Index - I
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_IX.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
I
EQ Board
Basic Functions, 5-17
General Description, 5-16
Equalization (EQ) Board, 5-16
Ethernet Signal, 5-67
External I/O, 5-65
Bi-directional Signals, 5-66
Input Signals, 5-65
Location in the Unit, 5-65
Output Signals, 5-67
EZBackup/Move, 8-18, 8-19
I/O Ports, 3-17
Image Management
Functional Checks, 4-13
Guide, 8-18
Inrush Current, 2-2
Installation
average time, 3-2
Internal I/O, 5-55
Connections, 5-57
connections, 5-57
Fuses, 5-58
Inputs, 5-59
Jumpers and Dip-switches, 5-58
LEDs, 5-58
Location in the Unit, 5-58
Outputs, 5-61
Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41
F
Facility Features
desired, 2-7
required, 2-7
Frog Leg
Angle Adjustment, 8-92
Front End Processor
Power Supply Board, 5-8
Simple Theory, 5-7
Front End Subsystem, 5-9
Functional Checks, 4-1
B/M-Mode Checks, 4-14
Basic Measurements, 4-16
Brakes, 4-25, 4-28
CFM and PWD Modes, 4-15
Control Panel, 4-3
Image Management, 4-13
Locks, 4-28
Mechanical, 4-25
Monitor Display, 4-5
Peripherals, 4-24
Probes/Connector Usage, 4-11
Required Equipment, 4-1
Touch Panel, 4-4
L
Label Locations, 1-18
LEDs SCB, 5-14
Line Printer
Connecting, 3-24
Loading Software
Application, 8-44
Base Image, 8-26
Login Screen for Global Service User Interface, 5-80
Logs, 5-83
M
Managing Patient Data and Presets, 8-18
Mechanical Checks
Operator I/O, 4-25
Mechanical Descriptions, 5-76
Monitor, 5-76
Top Console Positioning, 5-76
Mechanical Safety, 1-16
Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter, 10-23
Models Covered, 1-3, 9-2
G
Gas Shock Replacement, 8-74
Gas Spring
Adjustment, 6-8
Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3
General Cleaning, 10-8
Global Service User Interface, 5-80
Error Logs Page, 5-82
Service Home Page, 5-81
Global Service User Interface (GSUI), 5-80
H
Hazard Icons, 1-10
Human Safety, 1-16
Index - II
-
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_IX.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
Modem, 5-69
Inputs/Outputs, 5-69
LEDs, 5-70
Location in the Unit, 5-69
Monitor, 5-64
Counter-balance Adjustment, 6-4
Tilt, 6-4
Tilt Adjustment, 6-4
Monitor Display
Functional Checks, 4-5
O
Operator I/O
Emergency Release Procedure, 6-12
Operator Panel
position warning, 3-2
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Probes/Connector Usage
Functional Checks, 4-11
Product Icons, 1-11
PS Battery Operation, 5-35, 5-40
R
Rear Wheel Brakes
Adjustment, 6-16
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4
Regulatory, 6-1
Release Lock Assembly
Replacement Procedure, 8-70, , 8-72
RF Amplifier Board
Theory, 5-10
S
P
P4 Key Function, 7-13
Patient I/O, 5-54
PC Diagnostics, 7-31
(Interactive Tests), 7-32
PCI Cards, 5-35, , 5-40
PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards, 5-35, 5-40
PCVIC Card, 5-23, 5-28
Peripherals, 5-68
Functional Checks, 4-24
Physical Dimensions, 3-11
PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE, 10-28
Power Distribution, 5-71
Basic Overall AC, 5-71
Power Off, 3-9
Procedure, 4-9
Power On, 3-8, 4-6
Power Requirements, 2-2
electrical, 2-2
stability, 2-3
Power Stability Requirements, 2-3
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure BEP 2, 8-7
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure BEP 3, 8-10, 8-13
Power-up Procedures
Voltage Settings, 3-6
Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-6
Preset Data, 8-18
Probe
Leakage Current Test, 10-21
Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-10
Probe Leakage Current Test, 10-21
Probes, 3-21
Safety
reminders, 3-3
Safety Considerations, 1-16
Scan Control Board
High Level Features, 5-14
Scan Control Board (SCB), 5-13
SCB LED, 5-14
Screen Captures, 7-13
Service Adjustments, 6-1
Service Home Page, 5-81
Service Login, 5-80
Service Manual
Purpose of, 1-1
Service Platform, 5-79
Shut Down
Procedure, 4-9
Shutdown, 3-9
Software
Application Load, 8-44
Base Image Load, 8-26
System Features, 4-3
System Maintenance, 10-5
System Manufacturer, 1-24
System Setup, 8-65
T
Theory
Front End SubSystem, 5-9
General, 5-2
RF Amplifier Board, 5-10
XDIF Board, 5-9
Time Delay (TD) Boards, 5-12
Top Console, 5-63
See Operator I/O, 5-63
Top Plane Board, 5-9
Index - III
P
R E L I M I N A R Y
GE H
1/18/10
L9_IX.FM
EALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Touch Panel
Functional Checks, 4-3, 4-4
Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4
Troubleshooting
Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3
Screen Captures, 7-13
Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4
Vital System Information, 7-3
U
Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4
Upgrading Application Software, 8-49, 8-61
USB Adapter Setup, 5-32
User-Defined Backup Protocols, 8-22
Utilities, 5-89
V
Video
Specifications, 3-20
Voltage Settings, 3-6
W
Warnings and Cautions, 1-16
X
XDIF Board
Theory, 5-9
Z
Z-Release Cable
Adjustment, 6-8
Index - IV
-
© 2002-2010, General Electric Company.
GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC.
9900 Innovation Drive
Wauwatosa, Wisconsin 53226
USA
www.gehealthcare.com